Honda 2013 Accord Coupe Owners Manual

Honda-2013-Accord-Coupe-Owners-Manual-106986 honda-2013-accord-coupe-owners-manual-106986

Owners manual Pdf 3L1313OM 2013 Honda Accord Owners manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

2015-10-23

: Honda Honda-2013-Honda-Accord-Coupe-Owners-Manual-816761 honda-2013-honda-accord-coupe-owners-manual-816761 honda pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 554

DownloadHonda Honda-2013-Honda-Accord-Coupe-Owners-Manual-  Honda-2013-honda-accord-coupe-owners-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Contents

2013 Accord Coupe

Online Reference Owner's Manual

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
Navigation Key

QRG

Quick Reference Guide

TOC

Chapter Table of Contents

Index

Index

2 Safe Driving P. 25
For Safe Driving P. 26

Seat Belts P. 30

Airbags P. 37

2 Instrument Panel P. 65
Indicators P. 66

Gauges and Displays P. 79

2 Controls P. 83
Setting the Clock P. 84
Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 86
Opening and Closing the Moonroof * P. 107
Adjusting the Seats P. 125

2 Features P. 147
Audio System P. 148
Customized Features P. 273

Audio System Basic Operation P. 154, P. 177, P. 210
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * P. 311

2 Driving P. 391
Before Driving P. 392
Refueling P. 446

Towing a Trailer P. 397
Fuel Economy P. 448

2 Maintenance P. 451
Before Performing Maintenance P. 452
Maintenance MinderTM P. 455
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 483
Climate Control System Maintenance P. 497

2 Handling the Unexpected P. 503
Tools P. 504
Overheating P. 518

If a Tire Goes Flat P. 505
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 520

2 Information P. 529
Specifications P. 530
Emissions Testing P. 537

Home Book Table of Contents

00X31-T3L-6000
© 2012 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved

* Not available on all models

Identification Numbers P. 534
Warranty Coverages P. 539

Contents

2013 Accord Coupe
Quick Reference Guide
Child Safety P. 50

Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 62

Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 97
Security System P. 101
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 108
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 133

Safe Driving

P. 25

Instrument Panel

P. 65

Controls

P. 83

Features

P. 147

Driving

P. 391

Maintenance

P. 451

Handling the Unexpected

P. 503

Information

P. 529

Index

P. 546

Opening and Closing the Windows P. 104
Adjusting the Mirrors P. 123
Climate Control System P. 142

Audio Error Messages P. 263
General Information on the Audio System P. 269
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 313, P. 350 Compass* P. 388

When Driving P. 401
Accessories and Modifications P. 449

Braking P. 439

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 459
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 485
Cleaning P. 498

Replacing Light Bulbs P. 475
Battery P. 494

Engine Does Not Start P. 511
Fuses P. 524

Jump Starting P. 514
Emergency Towing P. 527

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 535
Authorized Manuals P. 541

Reporting Safety Defects P. 536
Customer Service Information P. 542

* Not available on all models

P. 2

Safety Labels P. 63

Parking Your Vehicle P. 443

Remote Transmitter Care P. 495

Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 517

Navigation Key
QRG

Quick Reference Guide

Index

TOC

Chapter Table of Contents

Home Book Table of Contents

Index

Quick Reference Guide
QRG

Visual Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

❙ ECON Button (P 420)
❙ System Indicators (P 66)
❙ Gauges (P 79)
❙ Information Display (P 80)
❙ ENGINE START/STOP Button*1 (P 109)
❙ Audio/Information Screen
(P 155) (P 181) (P 213)

❙ Audio System (P 154) (P 177)

(P 210)

❙ Audio with Touch Screen (P 178) (P 211)
❙ Hazard Warning Button
❙ Climate Control System (P 142)
*

❙ Rear Window Defogger (P 119)
❙ Heated Mirror Button * (P 119)
❙ Navigation System *
() See Navigation System Manual

❙ Seat Heater Switches * (P 141)
❙ Ignition Switch*1 (P 108)

Index
Home

2

❙ TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Button * (P 435)
❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P 432)
❙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Button * (P 429)
* 1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P 113)
❙ Fog Lights * (P 115)
❙ LaneWatchTM*(P 433)
❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift down) * (P 411) (P 415)
❙
(Display) Button (P 155) (P 181) (P 213)
❙ Horn (Press an area around
.)
❙ (Select/Reset) Knob (P 80)
❙ Brightness Control (P 118)
❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift up) * (P 411) (P 415)
❙ Wipers/Washers (P 117)
❙ Cruise Control Buttons (P 421)

❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 122)
❙ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons *
(P 219), () See Navigation System Manual

❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons (P 313) (P 350)

❙ SOURCE Button (P 153)
❙ (+ / (- / / Buttons (P 153)

Index
Home

* Not available on all models

3

QRG

Visual Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

❙ Power Window Switches (P 104)
❙ Power Door Lock Master Switch (P 96)
❙ Door Mirror Controls (P 124)
❙ Rearview Mirror (P 123)
❙ Interior Fuse Box (P 525)
❙ Driver's Front Airbag (P 40)
❙ Passenger's Front Airbag
(P 40)

❙ Parking Brake (P 439)
❙ Trunk Main Switch * (P 99)
❙ Glove Box (P 135)
❙ Accessory Power Socket
(P 138)

❙ USB Port (P 149)
❙ Auxiliary Input Jack (P 150)
❙ Shift Lever
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
(P 409)

Index
Home

4

❙ Hood Release Handle (P 461)
❙ Trunk Release (P 97)
❙ Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P 447)

Automatic Transmission
(P 413)

Manual Transmission
(P 417)
* Not available on all models

❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P 46)

QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

❙ Coat Hook (P 139)
❙ Ceiling Light (P 133)
❙ Seat Belts (P 30)
❙ Grab Handle
❙ Map Lights (P 134)
❙ Moonroof Switch *
(P 107)

❙ Sunglasses Holder
(P 140)

❙ Sun Visors
❙ Vanity Mirrors

❙ Front Seat (P 125)
❙ Accessory Power
Socket (P 138)

❙ Side Airbags (P 44)
❙ Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 57)
❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 59)
❙ Rear Seat (P 132)
❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 55)
* Not available on all models

Index
Home

5

QRG

Visual Index

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P 459)
❙ Windshield Wipers (P 117) (P 483)
❙ Power Door Mirrors (P 124)
❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 89)
❙ Headlights (P 113) (P 475)
❙ Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights (P 479) (P 479)
❙ Parking Lights (P 480) (P 480)
❙ Fog Lights * (P 478) (P 478)
❙ Tires (P 485) (P 505)
❙ How to Refuel (P 447)
❙ High-Mount Brake Light (P 482)
❙ Opening/Closing the Trunk (P 97)
❙ Emergency Trunk Release Lever (P 100)
❙ Trunk Release Button * (P 98)
❙ Multi-View Rear Camera (P 444)
❙ Rear Camera (P 445)

Index
Home

6

❙ Back-Up Lights (P 481)
❙ Brake/Taillights (P 481)
❙ Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 481)
❙ Rear Side Marker Lights (P 481)
* Not available on all models

Eco Assist System

QRG
Ambient Meter

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Ambient Meter

(P 420)

● Changes color to reflect your driving
style.
Green: Fuel efficient driving
Light green: Moderate acceleration/
deceleration
White: Aggressive acceleration/
deceleration
● The ambient meter color changes in
accordance with your brake or
accelerator pedal operation.

ECON Button (P 420)
Helps maximize fuel economy.

ECON Mode Indicator (P 75)
Comes on when the ECON button is
pressed.

Index
Home

7

QRG

Safe Driving

(P 25)

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Airbags (P 37)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety (P 50)
● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 62)
● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.

Seat Belts (P 30)

Before Driving Checklist (P 29)
Index
Home

8

● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.

● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.

Instrument Panel

(P 65)

QRG

Security System
Alarm Indicator

Speedometer

Temperature Gauge

System Indicators
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator

System Indicators
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) System
Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Smart Entry System
Indicator *

U.S.

Starter System
Indicator *

Canada
Electric Power
Steering (EPS) System
Indicator
Washer Level
Indicator *
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
* Not available on all models

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Gauges (P 79)/Information Display (P 80)/
System Indicators (P 66)

U.S.
Canada

Parking Brake
and Brake System
Indicator (Red)

Fuel Gauge

Tachometer
Shift Lever
Position
Indicator *

Automatic transmission (CVT)
models

M (7-speed manual shift mode)
Indicator/Shift Indicator
Automatic transmission models

System Indicators
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
ECON mode
Indicator
Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) Indicator*
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) Indicator*

U.S.

Brake System
Indicator (Amber)

Canada
Door and Trunk
Open Indicator

M (Sequential shift mode)
Indicator/Gear position
Indicator

Low Fuel Indicator

Lights Reminders

Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator

Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator

Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator

Fog Light Indicator *

CRUISE MAIN
Indicator

Index

Light Control
Indicator *

CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator

Home

9

QRG

Controls

(P 83)

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Clock (P 84)
Models without navigation system

ENGINE START/STOP
Button * (P 109)
Press the button to change the vehicle’s
power mode.

Low Beam

Flashing

a

Enter the Clock Adjustment screen.
2 Setting the Clock (P 84)

b

Rotate
p re ss
Rotate
press
.

Wipers and Washers (P 117)
Wiper/Washer Control Lever

to change hour, then
.

Turn Signals (P 113)
to change minute, then

Models with navigation system

10

Adjustment Ring
: Long Delay
: Short Delay

Turn Signal Control Lever
Right

The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.

Home

Light Control Switches
High Beam

c

Index

Lights (P 113)

Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.

Left

MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
* Not available on all models

Steering Wheel (P 122)

Trunk (P 97)

Trunk Release
● To unlock and open the trunk:

Unlocking the Doors
from the Inside
(P 94)
● Pull either door inner handle to unlock
and open it at the same time.

• Pull the trunk release.
• Press the trunk release button on the remote
transmitter or the smart entry remote.
• Press the trunk release button * on the
trunk lid.

Power Windows (P 104)
● With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, open
and close the power windows.
● If the power window lock button is in the
off position, the passenger's window can
be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator is on), the
passenger's window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button

QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

● To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
towards you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.

Indicator

Window
Switch

Power Door Mirrors
(P 124)
● With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, move
the selector switch to L or R.
● Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch

● Unlocking and opening the driver’s door
from the inner handle unlocks the
passenger’s door.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Adjustment Switch
* Not available on all models

Index
Home

11

Climate Control System (P 142)
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the
button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the
button to defrost the windshield.
Models with navigation system

The climate control system is voice operable. (P 219)

AUTO Button
Driver’s Side
Temperature Control
Buttons
(On/Off) Button
SYNC (Synchronized) Button
MODE Control Button
/

(Fan Control) Buttons

(Windshield Defroster) Button
Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Buttons

(Rear Window Defogger/Heated Mirror *)
Button
(Recirculation) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button

Air flows from dashboard vents.
Air flows from floor and dashboard
vents.
Air flows from floor vents.

Index

Air flows from floor and windshield
defroster vents.

Home

12

* Not available on all models

Features

(P 147)

Audio System (P 154) (P 177) (P 210)
Models with one display (P 154)

QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Audio Remote Controls
(P 153)
(+ / (- /

/

Button
Audio/Information
Screen

SOURCE
Button
● (+ / (- Button
Press and release to adjust the volume up/
down.
● SOURCE Button
Press and release to change the audio
mode: FM/AM/CD/XM® */HDD */USB/iPod®/
Bluetooth/Pandora® */AhaTM*/AUX.
●
/
Button
Radio:Press and release to change the
preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
CD/HDD */USB device:
Press and release to skip to the
beginning of the next song or
return to the beginning of the
current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.
* Not available on all models

CD Button
FM/AM Button
Button

CD Slot
AUX Button
PHONE Button
(CD Eject)
Button

DISP Button

SETTINGS Button

(Skip/Seek)
Button

(Skip/Seek)
Button

VOL/
(Volume/Power)
Knob

Selector Knob

MENU Button

BACK Button
Preset Buttons
(1-6)

Index
Home

13

Models with two displays (P 177)

QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen
Button

Phone*1
CD Slot
(CD Eject) Button

Source*1

Clock/Screen*1
DISP Button

(Tune Down) Icon*1
VOL/ (Volume/Power)
Knob
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1

(Tune Up) Icon*1
Selector Knob
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1
BACK Button

Presets*1

More*1

Index
Home

14

*1: Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.

Models with navigation system (P 210)

QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen

Source*1
CD Slot

(Power) Button

(Tune Down) Icon*1

(CD Eject) Button

(Tune Up) Icon*1

VOL (Volume) Knob
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1
Presets*1

More*1

PHONE Button

INFO Button

NAV Button

AUDIO Button

BACK Button
Button

MENU Button
SETTINGS Button

Index

Interface Dial/ENTER Button
*1: Icons that appear on the scr een vary by the source selected.

Home

15

QRG

Driving

(P 391)

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Manual Transmission (P 417)
Automatic Transmission (CVT) (P 409)
● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
● Shifting
Depress the brake pedal
and press the release button
to move out of (P .

Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.
Shift Lever

Reverse
Used when reversing.

Neutral
Transmission is not locked.

Drive

16

When the shift lever is in (D
Shift Indicator
Shift Down (- Shift Up (+
Paddle Shifter Paddle Shifter

Release
Button

Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.

Home

● Pulling a paddle shifter
(P 411)
● Allows you to manually shift
changes the mode from
the transmission up or down
automatic transmission (CVT) to
without removing your hands
7-speed manual shift mode.
from the steering wheel.
● The M indicator and the
selected speed number are
M Indicator
displayed in the shift indicator.

Press the release button to
move the shift lever.

Park

Index

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode When the shift lever is in (S

● Normal driving.
● 7-speed mode can be used
temporarily.

Drive (S)
●
●
●
●

Better acceleration.
Increased engine braking.
Going up or down hills.
7-speed manual shift
mode can be used.

● Pulling a paddle shifter
temporarily changes the mode
from automatic transmission
(CVT) to 7-speed manual shift
mode. The selected speed
number is displayed in the shift
indicator.

Automatic Transmission

(P 413)
Paddle Shifters (P 415)
● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine. ● Paddle shifters allow you to shift gears much like a manual
transmission (1st through 6th). This is useful for engine braking.
● Shifting

Press the release button to
move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.
Shift Lever

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Depress the brake pedal
and press the release button
to move out of (P .

QRG

Gear
Position ● D-paddle shift mode: The
Indicator
transmission will shift back to
automatic mode once the system
detects that the vehicle is cruising.
Selected Gear
M Indicator
● Sequential shift mode: Holds the
Number
selected gear, and the M indicator
comes on.
Shift Down (- Shift Up (+
● The selected gear position is
Paddle Shifter Paddle Shifter
shown in the instrument panel.

Release
Button

Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.

Reverse
Used when reversing.

Neutral
Transmission is not locked.

Drive
Normal driving. D-paddle shift
mode can be used

Drive (S)
Sequential shift mode can be used.

Index
Home

17

VSA® OFF Button (P 432)
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
● To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.

Cruise Control (P 421)
● Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
button, then press the –/SET button once
you have achieved the desired speed
(above 25 mph or 40 km/h).

Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (P 435)
● Detects a change in tire conditions and
overall dimensions due to decrease in tire
pressures.
● TPMS is turned on automatically every
time you start the engine.
● A calibration procedure must be
performed when certain conditions arise.

Index
Home

18

Refueling (P 446)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or
higher required
Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 L)

a

Push the fuel fill door
release handle.

b

Turn the fuel fill cap
slowly to remove the
cap.

c

Place the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill
door.

d

After refueling, screw
the cap back on until it
clicks at least once.

Maintenance

(P 451)

QRG

Under the Hood (P 459)

a

Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.

b

Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up
the hood.

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer
fluid. Add when necessary.
● Check brake fluid and clutch * fluid.
● Check the battery regularly.

Wiper Blades (P 483)
● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.

Tires (P 485)

Lights (P 475)

● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter
driving.

● Inspect all lights regularly.

Index

c

When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.

* Not available on all models

Home

19

QRG

Handling the Unexpected

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Flat Tire (P 505)
● Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
trunk.

Home

20

Engine Won't Start
(P 511)
● If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.

Overheating (P 518)
● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.

Indicators Come On

Blown Fuse (P 524)

Emergency Towing

(P 520)

● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.

(P 527)

● Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.

Index

(P 503)

● Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.

What to Do If

QRG
●
●

●

The steering wheel may be locked.
Try to turn the steering wheel left and right
while turning the ignition key *.
Move the steering wheel left and right while
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button * at
the same time.

The ignition switch does
not turn from (q to (0 *1
and I cannot remove the
key. Why?

The shift lever should be moved to (P .

Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?

This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.

Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

The ignition switch does
not turn from (0 to (q *1.
Why?

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

21

QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors
using a remote
transmitter?

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver's door?

The beeper sounds when:
● The key is left in the ignition switch *.
● The power mode * is in ACCESSORY.
● The exterior lights are left on.

Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?

The beeper sounds when:
● Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.
● The parking brake lever is not fully released.

Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.

Index
Home

22

* Not available on all models

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Event Data Recorders

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.

QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits
chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.

Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

Index
Home

23

QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Coupe

A Few Words About Safety

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
2013 Accord Coupe
including:

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgement.

3DANGER

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.

3WARNING

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.

3CAUTION

You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.

● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.

Index
Home

24

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions ............. 26
Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 28
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 30
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 33
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 36
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 37
Types of Airbags ................................ 40
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 40
Side Airbags....................................... 44

Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 46
Airbag System Indicators.................... 47
Airbag Care ....................................... 49
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 50
Safety of Infants and Small Children .......52

Safety of Larger Children ................... 60
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 62
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 63

Index
Home

25

For Safe Driving
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

TOC

The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.

Safe Driving

Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.

■ Restrain all children
Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.

■ Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.

■ Don't drink and drive
Index
Home

26

Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.

1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely

■ Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.

TOC
Safe Driving

Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.

■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

Index
Home

27

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Your Vehicle's Safety Features
1Your Vehicle's Safety Features

TOC

9

8

Safe Driving

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.

9

6
10
7
8

Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.

10

11

7

6
7
8
9
10
11

Index
Home

28

Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Seat Belt Tensioners

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.

However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Safety CheckList

2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 94

If the door and trunk open indicator is on, a door
and/or the trunk is not completely closed. Close both
doors and the trunk tightly until the indicator goes
off.
2 Door and Trunk Open Indicator P. 70

TOC
Safe Driving

For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure both doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider
from unexpectedly opening a door.

1Safety CheckList

• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 125

• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 128

• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 33

• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 50

Index
Home

29

Seat Belts
QRG

TOC
Safe Driving

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers

■ Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 57

Index
Home

30

2013 Accord Coupe

About Your Seat Belts
1About Your Seat Belts

3 WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Proper use of seat belts

1About Your Seat Belts

■ Seat Belt Reminder

If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.

TOC
Safe Driving

Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduces the effectiveness of
the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

1Seat Belt Reminder

Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1
before the driver's seat belt is fastened, a
beeper will sound and the indicator will blink.
If the driver does not fasten the belt before
the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on.

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within 6 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat,
or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator
will not come on.
This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot
detect their presence.

The beeper will also periodically sound and
the indicator will blink while driving until the
driver's and front passenger’s seat belts are
fastened.

Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Home
Continued

31

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
TOC
Safe Driving

Index
Home

32

The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags.

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

2013 Accord Coupe

Fastening a Seat Belt

QRG

After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 125

Correct
Seated
Posture.

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.

TOC
Safe Driving

Pull out slowly.

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.

Latch
Plate

Buckle

Index
Home
Continued

33

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

TOC
Safe Driving

Index
Home

34

Lap belt
as low as
possible

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

3 WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Advice for Pregnant Women

Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
• When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.

TOC
Safe Driving

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.

1Advice for Pregnant Women

Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.

Index
Home

35

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

QRG

Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

TOC

• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.

Safe Driving

• Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.

Index
Home

36

2013 Accord Coupe

Seat Belt Inspection
1Seat Belt Inspection

3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.

Airbags
2013 Accord Coupe

Airbag System Components

QRG

TOC
10

9

8

7

Safe Driving

8

12

8
6

8
11

8

Index

8

Home
Continued

37

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

TOC
Safe Driving

The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. Both side
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.
The airbag system includes:

d An electronic control unit that continually

monitors and records information about
the sensors, the airbag activators, the
seat belt tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the ignition
switch is in ON (w *1.

a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger's airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.

front seat belt tensioners. The
driver's and front passenger's seat belts
incorporate sensors that detect whether
or not they are fastened.

side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

c Two

side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

Index
Home

38

sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side
collision.

i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts

you that the front passenger's front
airbag has been turned off.

e Automatic

fA
b Two

h Impact

driver's seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.
sensors in the front passenger's
seat. The front passenger's airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant
or small child).

j An indicator on the instrument panel that

alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
k Safing

Sensor

lA

rollover sensor that detects whether
the vehicle is about to roll over.

g Weight

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP
button instead of an ignition switch.

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Important facts about your airbags

What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.

Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.

TOC
Safe Driving

Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.

1Important facts about your airbags

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Index
Home

39

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags

QRG

TOC

Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats.

Safe Driving

• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.

Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary
restraint system.

■ Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Home

40

2013 Accord Coupe

Types of Airbags
1Types of Airbags

The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch
is in ON (w *1.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. Although the powder is not
harmful, people with respiratory problems may
experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs,
get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags
(SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiplethreshold front airbags (SRS).
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Operation
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

TOC
Safe Driving

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

■ How the Front Airbags Work

1How the Front Airbags Work

While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won't interfere with the driver's visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.

Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

Index
Home
Continued

41

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ When front airbags should not deploy
TOC
Safe Driving

Index
Home

42

Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags
and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags
could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a
rollover.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Advanced Airbags

1Advanced Airbags

Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor

If the seat is too far forward, the airbag
inflates with less force, regardless of the
severity of the impact.

The passenger's advanced front airbag system
has weight sensors.

Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors

Although we recommend against carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the sensors
detect the weight of a child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically
turn off the passenger's front airbag.

If there is a problem with the driver's seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver's seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
• Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
• Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
• Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
• All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
• Do not place any cover over the passenger side
dashboard.

TOC
Safe Driving

Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced front airbag system
includes a seat position sensor.

Make sure the floor mat behind the front passenger’s
seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly
placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag
sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 499

Index
Home

43

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

QRG

TOC

2013 Accord Coupe

Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

Safe Driving

■ Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver's and passenger's seatbacks.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
Housing
Location

■ Operation
When
inflated

Side
Airbag

Index
Home

44

When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.

1Side Airbags
Make sure you and your front seat passenger always
sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
prevent the airbag from deploying properly and
increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger side, the airbag
deploys even if there is no passenger in the passenger
seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage

■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards
the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts
absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have
been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

TOC
Safe Driving

Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.

Index
Home

45

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

2013 Accord Coupe

Side Curtain Airbags

TOC

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer
seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags
equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly
rollover crashes.

Safe Driving

QRG

■ Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.

1Side Curtain Airbags
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the
passenger’s side curtain airbag will inflate even if
there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

■ Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.

Index
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

Home

46

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal
collision.

TOC
Safe Driving

In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.

Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on.

■ SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator

1SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator

■ When the ignition switch is turned to
ON (w *1
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.

3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Home
Continued

47

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
TOC

U.S.

Canada

■ When the passenger airbag off

Safe Driving

indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the front passenger’s weight
sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the
weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensors. Such as:

• An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.

• A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.

• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger's seat.

• The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 50

Index
Home

48

an object on the seat or floor behind it.

• An object placed under the front passenger's seat.

Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.

If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will not come on.

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

2013 Accord Coupe

Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.

TOC
Safe Driving

■ When the airbags have deployed

QRG
1Airbag Care

■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the
passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate
a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American
Honda Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles,
Honda Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.

Index
Home

49

Child Safety
QRG

Protecting Child Passengers

TOC

Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the
number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.

Safe Driving

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver's ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.

Index
Home

50

2013 Accord Coupe
1Protecting Child Passengers

3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Canada recommend
that all children age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/
territories have laws restricting where children may
ride.

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.

• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.

3 WARNING

TOC

Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.

Safe Driving

• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.

1Protecting Child Passengers

Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 63

Index
Home

51

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

QRG

■ Protecting Infants
TOC

2013 Accord Coupe

Safety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is
at least one year old.
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.

1Protecting Infants

3 WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 37

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

Index
Home

52

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Protecting Smaller Children

1Protecting Smaller Children

3 WARNING

TOC

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.

Safe Driving

If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured
forward-facing child seat.
■ Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position.

If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.

Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height and weight are
appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

Index
Home
Continued

53

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Selecting a Child Seat
TOC
Safe Driving

Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.

■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

Index
Home

54

1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
TOC
Safe Driving

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.

Marks

Lower Anchors

Rigid Type

2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.

Index
Flexible Type

Home
Continued

55

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Tether Strap
Hook

TOC

3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the
head restraint.

Safe Driving

4. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
Anchor

5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat maker.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

Index
Home

56

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child's safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat
that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.

TOC
Safe Driving

2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker's instructions,
and insert the latch plate into the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 2 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.

Index
Home

Continued

57

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

TOC

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.

Safe Driving

7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

Index
Home

58

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Adding Security with a Tether
Tether Anchorage Points

Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.

TOC
Safe Driving

Cover

A tether anchorage point is provided behind
each rear seating position. A child seat that is
installed with a seat belt and comes with a
tether can use the tether for additional
security.

1Adding Security with a Tether

1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage
point and lift the cover.

Anchor
Outer Position

Tether Strap
Hook

Rear outer seating positions

2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs.
Rear center seating position

2. Remove the head restraint.
2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 129
Anchor
Center Position

Tether Strap
Hook

All positions

3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
u Make sure the strap is not twisted.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
Rear center seating position

5. Reinstall the head restraint.
u Make sure to adjust the head restraint in
its highest position.
Anchor

2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 129

Index
Home

59

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

QRG

■ Protecting Larger Children
TOC
Safe Driving

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.

■ Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■ Checklist
• Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

Index
Home

60

2013 Accord Coupe

Safety of Larger Children
1Safety of Larger Children

3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Booster Seats

1Booster Seats

■ Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks

When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.

TOC
Safe Driving

If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child's safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer's recommendations.

There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.

Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.

■ Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.

Index
Home

61

Exhaust Gas Hazard
QRG

Carbon Monoxide Gas

TOC

The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.

Safe Driving

■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open both windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the

mode.

3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.

Index
Home

62

2013 Accord Coupe
1Carbon Monoxide Gas

3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.

Safety Labels
2013 Accord Coupe

Label Locations

QRG

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.

TOC
Safe Driving

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
Sun Visor
U.S. models

Dashboard
U.S. models only

Canadian models

Doorjambs
U.S. models

Canadian models

Radiator Cap

Index
Home

63

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Index
Home

64

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators ............................................ 66
Information Display Warning and
Information Messages...................... 77
Gauges and Displays
Gauges.............................................. 79
Information Display............................ 80

Index
Home

65

Indicators
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

U.S.
●

TOC
Instrument Panel

Canada

Parking Brake
and Brake
System Indicator
(Red)

●
●

●

U.S.

Canada

●

Brake System
Indicator
(Amber)

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and
goes off when it is released.
Comes on when the brake fluid level is low.
Comes on if there is a problem with the brake
system.
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if
you drive with the parking brake not fully
released.

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the brake
override system.

●

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home

66

Explanation
Comes on while driving - Make sure the
parking brake is released. Check the brake fluid
level.
2 What to do when the indicator comes on
P. 522
●

Comes on along with the ABS indicator Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On P. 522

Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.

uuIndicatorsu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Low Oil Pressure
Indicator

●

Malfunction
Indicator Lamp

●

●

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to
ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.

●

Comes on while driving - Immediately stop
in a safe place.

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to
ON (w *1, and goes off either when the engine
starts or after several seconds if the engine is not
started. If “readiness codes” have not been set, it
blinks five times before it goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions
control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the engine's cylinders is
detected.

●

Readiness codes are part of the on board
diagnostics for the emissions control systems.

●

Comes on while driving - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place
where there are no flammable objects. Stop
the engine for 10 minutes or more, and wait
for it to cool down. Then, take the vehicle to a
dealer.

2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes
On P. 520

2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 537

●

TOC
Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks P. 521
●

Charging System
Indicator

●

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to
ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the battery is not charging.

●

Comes on while driving - Turn off the
climate control system and rear defogger in
order to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On P. 520

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home
Continued

67

uuIndicatorsu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Indicator

Name
Shift Lever
Position
Indicator *

TOC

On/Blinking

●

Indicates in which position your shift lever is.

Explanation

2 Shifting P. 409
P. 413

Instrument Panel

Automatic transmission (CVT) models

Indicator

Name
M (7-speed
manual shift
mode) Indicator/
Shift Indicator

On/Blinking
●

Comes on when 7-speed manual shift mode is
applied.

Explanation

2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 411

Automatic transmission models

Indicator

Name
M (Sequential
shift mode)
Indicator/Gear
Position
Indicator

On/Blinking
●

Explanation

Comes on when manual sequential shift mode is
applied.
2 Sequential Shift Mode P. 415

Index
Home

68

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Blinks if the transmission system has a problem.

Explanation
●

Transmission
Indicator *

Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator

Low Fuel
Indicator

●

●

●

●

●

ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System)
Indicator

●

Comes on and the beeper sounds if you are not
wearing a seat belt when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w *1.
If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt,
the indicator comes on about six seconds later.
Blinks while driving if either you or the front
passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The
beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular
intervals.

●

Comes on when the fuel reserve is running low
(approximately 2.6 U.S. gal./9.7 Liter left).
Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge.

●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem
with the ABS.

●

●

The beeper stops and the indicator goes off
when you and the front passenger fasten their
seat belts.
Stays on after you or the front passenger
has fastened the seat belt - A detection
error may have occurred in the sensor. Have
the vehicle checked by a dealer.

TOC
Instrument Panel

●

Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts
and acceleration and have the vehicle checked
by a dealer immediately.

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 31

●

Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as
possible.
Blinks - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer. With this indicator on,
your vehicle still has normal braking ability but
no anti-lock function.
2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 441

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

Continued

69

uuIndicatorsu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

TOC
Instrument Panel

Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator

●

●

VSA® (Vehicle
Stability Assist)
System Indicator
VSA® (Vehicle
Stability Assist)
OFF Indicator

●
●

●

●

●

Door and Trunk
Open Indicator

●

●

Index
Home

70

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if a problem with any of the following
is detected:
- Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner

●

Stays on constantly or does not come on at
all - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Blinks when VSA® is active.
Comes on if there is a problem with the VSA®
system or hill start assist system.

●

Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) System
P. 431

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate VSA®.
Comes on for a few seconds if you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if either door or the trunk is not
completely closed.
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if
either door or the trunk is opened while driving.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

2 VSA® On and Off P. 432

●

Goes off when both doors and the trunk are
closed.

uuIndicatorsu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Indicator

Name
EPS (Electric
Power Steering)
System Indicator

On/Blinking
●

Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1.
May come on briefly if the ignition switch is
turned to ON (w *1 and the vehicle is not moved
within 45 seconds, to indicate the calibration
process is not yet complete.
Comes on and stays on when:
- One or more tires’ pressures are determined to
be significantly low.
- The system has not been calibrated.

●

●

Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if
there is a problem with the TPMS, or when a
compact spare tire is temporarily installed.

●

Blinks and remains on - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with
a compact spare, get your regular tire repaired
or replaced and put back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.

●

The turn signal indicators blink when you operate
the turn signal lever.
If you press the hazard warning button, both
indicators and all turn signals blink at the same
time.

●

Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn
signal light bulb has blown. Change the bulb
immediately.

●

●

Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators

●

●

Stays on constantly or does not come on at
all - Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the EPS System Indicator Comes On
P. 522

●

Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe
place, check tire pressures, and inflate the
tire(s) if necessary.
Stays on after the tires are inflated to the
recommended pressures - The system needs
to be calibrated.

TOC
Instrument Panel

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to
ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS
(Electric Power Steering) System.

●

●

Low Tire
Pressure/TPMS
Indicator

Explanation

2 TPMS Calibration P. 435

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 479
P. 481

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Home
Continued

71

uuIndicatorsu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Indicator

Name
High Beam
Indicator

TOC
Instrument Panel

Lights On
Indicator
Fog Light
Indicator *

On/Blinking
●

Comes on when the high beam headlights are on.

●

Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or in
AUTO when the exterior lights are on.

●

Comes on when the fog lights are on.

●

●

Explanation

Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot
recognize the key information.

Immobilizer
System Indicator

—
●

—
●

●

●

●

Security System
Alarm Indicator

Blinks when the security system alarm has been
set.

If you remove the key from the ignition switch*1
while the exterior lights are on, a chime sounds
when the driver's door is opened.

Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1, pull the key out,
and then insert the key and turn it to ON (w *1
again.
Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add
other devices to it. Electrical problems can
occur.

2 Security System Alarm P. 101

Indicator

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Home

72

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

●

Forward
Collision
Warning
(FCW)
Indicator *

●

Comes on for a few seconds
when you change the power
mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on when you have
customized FCW to turn off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the FCW system.

●

Blinks when the system detects
a likely collision with a vehicle
in front of you. The beeper
sounds.

●

Comes on when the FCW
system shuts itself off.

●

Message

Stays on constantly without FCW off - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.

TOC

Blinks while driving - Take appropriate action to prevent
a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.).

—

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

Stays on - The temperature inside the FCW system is too high.
The system activates when the temperature inside the system
cools down.
2 Automatic shutoff P. 426

●

●

Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud,
etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft
cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and
message come back on after you cleaned the area around
the camera.
2 Automatic shutoff P. 426
2 Automatic shutoff P. 426

—

Index
Home

* Not available on all models

Continued

73

uuIndicatorsu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

TOC

●

Instrument Panel

●

●

Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)
Indicator *

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the LDW system.

●

Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.

Blinks when your vehicle is too close
to the lane lines. The beeper sounds.

●

Blinks while driving - Take
appropriate action to keep your vehicle
within the lane lines.

Comes on when the LDW system
shuts itself off.

●

Message

—

Stays on - The temperature inside the
LDW camera is too high.
The system activates when the
temperature inside the camera cools
down.
2 LDW Camera P. 429

●

●

Index

Stays on - The area around the camera
is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off
with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator and message come back
on after you cleaned the area around
the camera.
2 LDW Camera P. 429

Home

74

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

CRUISE MAIN
Indicator

●

Comes on when you press the CRUISE button.

CRUISE
CONTROL
Indicator

●

Comes on if you have set a speed for cruise
control.

Washer Level
Indicator *

●

Maintenance
Minder Indicator

●

●

TOC
2 Cruise Control P. 421

2 Cruise Control P. 421

●

Refill the washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 474

●

Smart Entry
System
Indicator *

Comes on when the washer fluid gets low.

2 ECON Button P. 420

Instrument Panel

●

Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to
ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when you press the ECON button.

ECON Mode
Indicator

Explanation

●

Comes on when the scheduled maintenance is
due soon.
Comes on for a few seconds when you change
the power mode to ON.
Comes on as soon as a problem is detected in the
smart entry system or push button starting
system.

2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 455
●

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

Continued

75

uuIndicatorsu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Indicator

Name
●

U.S.

TOC
Instrument Panel

Canada

On/Blinking

Starter System
Indicator *

●

●

Light Control
Indicator *

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when you set the
power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on if the starting system has a problem.

●

As a temporary measure, press and hold the
ENGINE START/STOP button for 15 seconds
while pressing the brake pedal and manually
start the engine. Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.

Comes on if there is a problem with the automatic
lighting control system or low beam headlights *.

●

Comes on while driving - Turn the lights on
manually and have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home

76

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages

2013 Accord Coupe

Information Display Warning and Information Messages

QRG

The following messages appear only on the information display.
Message

Condition
●

Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not
installed.
Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on
the battery.

2 Check Fuel Cap Message P. 521

●

TOC

Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

Index
Home
Continued

77

uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Models with smart entry system

Message

Condition
●

Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP button
to turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P .

●

Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.

TOC
Instrument Panel

Index
Home

78

Explanation
●

Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after
moving the shift lever to (P .

—

●

Appears when the steering wheel is locked.

●

Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing
the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same time.

●

Appears when you close the door with the power mode
in ON without the smart entry remote inside the vehicle.

●

Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back
inside the vehicle and close the door.

●

Appears when the smart entry remote’s battery
becomes weak.

●

Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 495

Gauges and Displays
2013 Accord Coupe

Gauges

QRG

Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.
They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).

TOC

Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

■ Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE

Instrument Panel

■ Tachometer

You should refuel when the reading approaches E .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.

■ Temperature Gauge
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the
upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull
safely to the side of the road and allow engine
temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 518

Index
Home

79

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Information Display
The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and
maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.

■ Switching the Display
TOC

Press the

1Switching the Display
Each time you press the
knob, the information
display changes as follows:
Instant Fuel Economy,
Odometer, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature

(Select/Reset) knob to change the display.

Instrument Panel

Instant Fuel Economy,
Range, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature

Select/Reset
Knob

Instant Fuel Economy, Average
Fuel Economy A, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature

Instant Fuel Economy, Average
Fuel Economy B, Trip Meter B,
Outside Temperature

Engine Oil Life

Index
Home

80

Some of the items on the information display also
appear on the audio/information screen. They also
change along with the information display changes
while the fuel consumption is shown.

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Odometer
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has
accumulated.

■ Trip Meter

1Trip Meter

■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the
reset to 0.0.

knob. The trip meter is

■ Average Fuel Economy

TOC
Instrument Panel

Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last
reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the
knob.

1Average Fuel Economy

Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.

You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy.
2 Customized Features P. 273

■ Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).

■ Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 455

Index
Home
Continued

81

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

■ Adjusting the outside temperature indicator
TOC
Instrument Panel

Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F or ± 3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Press and hold the
(Select/Reset) knob for 10 seconds or more while the
outside temperature is shown on the information display.
uThe information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display
starts showing from -5°F to +5°F (U.S.) or -3°C to +3°C (Canada).
3. Release the
knob when the right adjustment amount is shown.
uThe adjustment is complete.

■ Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.

Index
Home

82

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
1Adjusting the outside temperature indicator
Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F or ± 3°C.

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Setting the Clock ................................ 84
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................... 86

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal
Strength *......................................88

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................... 94
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ............ 96
Opening and Closing the Trunk......... 97
Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 101
Security System Alarm...................... 101
Opening and Closing the Windows..... 104
Opening and Closing the Moonroof * .. 107
* Not available on all models

Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch * ............................... 108
ENGINE START/STOP Button * ........... 109
Ignition Switch and Power Mode
Comparison ................................... 112
Turn Signals ..................................... 113
Light Switches.................................. 113
Fog Lights * ...................................... 115
Daytime Running Lights ................... 116
Wipers and Washers ........................ 117
Brightness Control ........................... 118
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror *
Button ........................................... 119

Driving Position Memory System * .... 120
Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 122
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 123
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 124
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 125
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Items ................................................ 133
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 142
Synchronized Mode ......................... 144
Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 145

Index
Home

83

Setting the Clock
QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Clock
Models without navigation system

1Clock

You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

Models with navigation system

The clock is automatically updated through the
navigation system, so the time does not need to be
adjusted.

■ Adjusting the Time
■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen

Models without navigation system

Models with one display

These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

TOC

Models with two displays

Rotate

Controls

1. Press and hold the DISP button.

Press

to select.
to enter.

All models

2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Clock,
then Clock Adjustment.
3. Rotate

to change hour, then press

4. Rotate

to change minute, then press

Index
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Home

84

.
.

You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 273
You can turn the clock display on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 273

uuSetting the ClockuClock

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Models with one display

1Using the SETTINGS button

■ Using the SETTINGS button
1. Press and hold the CLOCK (SETTINGS)
button until the clock display blinks.

To set the time to the nearest hour: Press and hold
the CLOCK button until the clock display blinks, then
press the (6 (Reset) button.

(6 (Reset) Button

2. Press Preset (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute) to
adjust the time.

Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets
forward or backward.

3. Press the CLOCK button again to set the
time.

Example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00

(4 (Hour) Button

TOC
Controls

CLOCK (SETTINGS)
Button

(5 (Minute) Button
Models with two displays

■ Using the audio with touch screen
1. Select

.

2. Select Clock.
3. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting
3/4.
4. Select 12H or 24H.
5. Press Set to set the time.

Index
Home

85

Locking and Unlocking the Doors
QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following key:

■ Master Keys
Master Key *

Smart Entry
Remote *

TOC

Use the keys to start and stop the engine, to
lock and unlock the doors and to open the
trunk. You can also use the remote
transmitter or smart entry system * to lock and
unlock the doors and to open the trunk.

Controls

There is a panic button in the remote
transmitter.

■ Smart entry remote
Release Knob

Built-in Key

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
doors when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.

1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 101
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
• Keep the keys away from liquids.
• Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.

To remove the built-in key, pull it out while
sliding the release knob. To reinstall the builtin key, push the built-in key into the smart
entry remote until it clicks.

Index
Home

86

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Valet Key *
Gray

1Valet Key *

Can be used to start and stop the engine, and
lock and unlock driver's door.

When you need to leave a key with a third party,
leave the valet key.

TOC
Controls

■ Key Number Tag

1Key Number Tag

Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

87

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *

QRG

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/
unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or starting
the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.

TOC

• You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.

2013 Accord Coupe
1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *
Communication between the smart entry remote and
the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s
battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.

Controls

• A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.

Index
Home

88

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

2013 Accord Coupe

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

QRG
1Using the Remote Transmitter

■ Using the Remote Transmitter
■ Locking the doors

Lock Button

Press the lock button.
Once:
uSome exterior lights flash, both doors
lock, and the security system sets.

LED

If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
the unlock button.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30
seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off
immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 133

TOC
Controls

Unlock Button

Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
uThe beeper sounds and verifies the
security system is set.

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 273

The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
Models without smart entry system

The remote transmitter will not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter or smart entry system only when the
power mode in VEHICLE OFF.
All models

The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is
open.

Index
Home

Continued

89

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
uSome exterior lights flash twice, and the driver's door unlocks.
Twice:
uThe passenger’s door unlocks.

TOC
Controls

Index
Home

90

1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is
probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 495
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 273

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *
When you carry the smart entry remote, you
can lock/unlock the doors and open the trunk.
You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius
of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door
handle. You can open the trunk within about
32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk
release button.

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *

• Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.

• A person who is not carrying the smart entry
•
•

■ Locking the doors and the trunk
Door Lock Button

Press the door lock button on either door.
uSome exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; both doors and the trunk lock;
and the security system sets.

•

TOC
Controls

•

remote can lock/unlock the doors if a person who
is carrying it is within range.
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the smart entry remote is within range.
If you grip either door handle wearing gloves, the
door sensor may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors.
You cannot unlock the door by gripping the handle
after two seconds of locking it.
The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.

If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is
probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 495
You can customize the door lock mode and keyless
lock acknowledgement setting.
2 Customized Features P. 273

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

Continued

91

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Unlocking the doors and the trunk
Grab the driver’s door handle:
uThe driver’s door unlocks.
uSome exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the passenger’s door handle:
uBoth doors and the trunk unlock.
uSome exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.

TOC
Controls

Trunk Release Button

Press the trunk release button:
uThe trunk unlocks and opens.
2 Using the Trunk Release Button * P. 98

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *

• Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart
entry remote if it is above or below the outside
handle.
• The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too
close to the door and door glass.
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically
relock.
The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be
customized.
2 Customized Features P. 273

Index
Home

92

* Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
Fully insert the key and turn it.
Lock

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door with a key, the
passenger’s door locks at the same time. When
unlocking, the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the
key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the
passenger’s door.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 273

Unlock

■ Locking the driver's door
Push the lock tab forward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.

Controls

■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key

TOC

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door, the passenger’s
door locks at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand before
locking the door to prevent it from being locked in
the vehicle.

■ Locking the passenger's door
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

■ Lockout prevention system
The doors cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch*1, or the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home

93

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

QRG

■ Using the Lock Tab
To Lock

Lock Tab

1Using the Lock Tab

■ Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.

■ Unlocking a door
To Unlock

TOC
Controls

Index
Home

94

2013 Accord Coupe

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Pull the lock tab rearward.

When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, the passenger’s door locks at the same
time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Unlocking Using the Inner Handle

1Unlocking Using the Inner Handle

Pull the inner handle.
uThe door unlocks and opens in one
motion.

Inner Handle

The inner handles are designed to allow front seat
occupants to open the door in one motion. However
this feature requires that front seat occupants never
pull an inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.

TOC
Controls

Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks both doors.
To avoid both doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
uThis setting works for one time only. If you do not want both doors to be
unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using
the audio/information screen.

Index
Home
Continued

95

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock both doors.
To Lock

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the driver's door using the
master lock switch, the passenger’s door locks/
unlocks at the same time.

To Unlock

TOC
Controls

Master Door
Lock Switch

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks and unlocks both doors automatically when a certain condition is
met.

■ Auto Door Locking
■ Drive lock mode
Both doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

■ Auto Door Unlocking
■ Driver’s door open mode
Index
Home

96

Both doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the audio/
information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 273

Opening and Closing the Trunk
2013 Accord Coupe

Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk

QRG

■ Opening the trunk
Open the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.

■ Closing the trunk
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
uAvoid possible damage.
uPrevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.

TOC

2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 62

Controls

Using the Trunk Opener
Pulling the trunk release to the lower left of
the driver's seat unlocks and opens the trunk.

Trunk
Release

Index
Home
Continued

97

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button *

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Locking the trunk opener
You can lock the trunk release with the master
key * or the built-in key *.

1Locking the trunk opener
Models without smart entry system

If you need to give the key to someone else, give
them the valet key.

TOC
Controls

Using the Trunk Release Button *
Trunk Release Button

Press the release button on the trunk lid after
the doors are unlocked.
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the
trunk if you carry the smart entry remote.
uThe beeper will sound.

1Using the Trunk Release Button *

• Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.

• A person who is not carrying the smart entry
remote can unlock the trunk if a person who is
carrying it is within range.
• Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the
trunk and close the lid. The beeper sounds and the
trunk cannot be closed.
• Do not carry the smart entry remote near the trunk
lid when closing it.
• Do not place the smart entry remote around the
rear seat when closing the trunk.

Index
Home

98

* Not available on all models

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter

2013 Accord Coupe

Using the Remote Transmitter

QRG

Press the trunk release button for
approximately one second to unlock and open
the trunk.

Trunk Button

TOC

1Trunk Main Switch *

The trunk main switch disables the trunk
release button on the remote transmitter and
the trunk release button on the trunk lid to
protect luggage in the trunk.

Main Switch

ON
OFF

Controls

Trunk Main Switch *

If you need to give the key to someone else, remove
the built-in key from the smart entry remote by
sliding the release knob, and give the remote as a
valet key.

1. Make sure the rear seat-back is not folded
down.
2. Turn off the trunk main switch in the glove
box.
3. Lock the glove box.
4. Lock the trunk release.
2 Using the Trunk Opener P. 97

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

99

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener

QRG

The trunk release lever allows you to open the
trunk from inside for your safety.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the
arrow.

TOC
Controls

Index
Home

100

2013 Accord Coupe

Emergency Trunk Opener

Lever

1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be
shown how to use this feature.

Security System
2013 Accord Coupe

Immobilizer System

QRG

The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or
pressing the ENGINE START STOP button:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the
ENGINE START STOP button.

NOTICE

Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in
theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the ignition key with you whenever you
leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.

• Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the ignition
switch.

TOC
Controls

• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.

1Immobilizer System

1Security System Alarm

Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the doors, trunk, or hood are opened
without the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system.

The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system deactivates.

■ When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash.

■ To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or smart entry remote. The
system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.

Index
Home
Continued

101

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The ignition switch is in LOCK (0 *1, and the key has been removed from the
ignition switch.
• The hood and trunk are closed.

TOC

• Both doors are locked from outside with the key, the remote transmitter, or smart
entry system.

Controls

■ When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the
blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set.

■ To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key,
remote transmitter, smart entry system or the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1.
The security system indicator goes off at the same time.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home

102

1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
• Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
• Opening the trunk with the trunk release or the
emergency trunk opener.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
device to it.

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Panic Mode
■ The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.

■ Canceling panic mode

TOC
Controls

Panic Button

Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home

103

Opening and Closing the Windows
QRG

Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON
(w *1, using the switches on the doors. The driver's side switches can be used to
open and close both windows.
The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (not
pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the passenger’s window from the
passenger's side.

TOC
Controls

When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you
can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on when
children are in the vehicle.

■ Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
On
Off
Power Window
Lock Button
Driver’s
Window
Switch

Indicator

Passenger’s
Window Switch

Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0 *1.

To open: Push the switch down firmly.

Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it will stop closing and reverse
direction.

To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.

■ Manual operation

Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

104

3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Opening either door cancels this function.

To close: Pull the switch up lightly.

Home

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

■ Automatic operation

To open: Push the switch down lightly.

Index

2013 Accord Coupe

The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function *
To open: Push the switch down.
Close

To close: Pull the switch up.

Open

Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.

TOC
Controls

■ Opening Windows and Moonroof with the Remote *
To open: Press the unlock button twice
within 10 seconds and hold it down for the
second time. If the windows stop midway,
repeat the procedure.

Unlock
Button

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

Continued

105

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key *
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
Close

TOC

Open

Controls

To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/
moonroof at the desired position. If you want
further adjustment, repeat the same
operation.

Index
Home

106

* Not available on all models

Opening and Closing the Moonroof *
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. Use the
switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
Open

■ Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly, then
release.

Tilt

The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.

■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.

■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone's hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
NOTICE

Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.

TOC
Controls

Close

To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.

1Opening/Closing the Moonroof

The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.

Index
Home

107

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Ignition Switch *
1Ignition Switch *
Manual transmission models

(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this

3 WARNING

position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
(w ON: This is the position when driving.

TOC
Controls

(e START: This position is for starting the engine.
The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of

Removing the key from the ignition switch
while driving locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Remove the key from the ignition switch
only when parked.

the key.
Automatic transmission (CVT) models

You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is
in (P .
All models

If you open the driver's door when the key is in LOCK
(0 or ACCESSORY (q , a warning buzzer will sound
to remind you to take the key out.
If the key won't turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY
(q , turn the key while moving the steering wheel left
and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing
the key to turn.

Index
Home

108

* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *

2013 Accord Coupe

ENGINE START/STOP Button *

QRG

■ Changing the Power Mode

1ENGINE START/STOP Button *
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range

Automatic Transmission
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Indicator
Indicator in the button is off.
The steering wheel is locked. The
power to all electrical
components is turned off.

Manual Transmission

Operating Range

Indicator

TOC
Controls

ACCESSORY
Indicator in the button is on.
Indicator in the button blinks
(from ON to ACCESSORY).
Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.

ON
Indicator in the button is on.
All electrical components can be
used.
Without pressing
the brake pedal
Press the button without the shift
lever in (P .

You can start the engine when the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle.
The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is
close to the door or window, even if it is outside the
vehicle.
ON mode:
Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.

Without pressing
the clutch pedal

If the smart entry remote battery is weak, the beeper
sounds.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 512

Press the button.
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON
when you get out.

Shift to (P then press the button.

Index
Home

* Not available on all models

Continued

109

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Automatic Power Off
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P *1 and the
power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid the battery drain.
When in this mode:
The steering wheel does not lock.

TOC
Controls

You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry
system.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Index
Home

110

*1: Automatic transmission/CVT models
* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
buzzer sounds.

■ Smart Entry Remote Reminder

■ When the power mode is in ON
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed,
warning buzzers sound from both inside and
outside the vehicle. A warning message on
the information display notifies the driver
inside that the remote is out.

■ When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and both doors are closed, a warning
buzzer sounds from outside the vehicle.

1Smart Entry Remote Reminder
When the smart entry remote is within the system’s
operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the
warning function cancels.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle
after the engine has been started, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is
in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button.

TOC
Controls

Warning buzzers may sound from inside or/
and outside the vehicle to remind you that the
smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the
buzzer continues even after the remote is put
back inside, place it to be within its
operational range.

Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard
or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer
to go off. Under some other conditions that can
prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the
warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is
within the system’s operational range.

Index
Home

* Not available on all models

111

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
Ignition Switch
Position

LOCK (0)
(with/without
the key)

Without Smart Entry
System

●

●

TOC
Controls

●

Power Mode

Engine is turned off and
power is shut down.
The steering wheel is
locked.
No electrical
components can be
used.

VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK)

ACCESSORY (I)

●
●

Engine is turned off.
Some electrical
components such as the
audio system and the
accessory power socket
can be operated.

ACCESSORY

ON (II)

●

●

START (III)

Normal key position
while driving.
All electrical components
can be used.

ON
Indicator is: On

●

●

Use this position to start
the engine.
The ignition switch
returns to the ON (II)
position when you
release the key.

START
Off

With Smart Entry
Indicator-Off
Indicator-On or blinking
IndicatorIndicator-Off
● The mode automatically
System and ENGINE ● Engine is turned off and ● Engine is turned off.
On (engine is turned off)
● Some electrical
power is shut down.
returns to ON after the
START/ STOP
Off (engine is running)
● The steering wheel is
engine starts.
components such as the ● All electrical components
Button
locked.
can be used.
audio system and the
● No electrical
accessory power socket
components can be
can be operated.
used.

Index
Home

112

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals

2013 Accord Coupe

Turn Signals
Right Turn

QRG
The turn signals can be used when the ignition
switch is in ON (w *1.

■ One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.
Left Turn

This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.

TOC

1Light Switches

■ Manual Operation
High Beams

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the position of the
ignition switch*1.

■ High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights

■ Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.

■ Flashing the high beams

Controls

Light Switches
If you remove the key from the ignition switch while
the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 72
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.

Pull the lever back, and release it.

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued

Home

113

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Automatic Lighting Control

1Automatic Lighting Control

Automatic lighting control can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

TOC
Controls

When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
uYou can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
2 Customized Features P. 273

We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.

Light Sensor

Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting

Index
Home

114

MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN

The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
Bright

Dark

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights *

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Headlight Integration with Wiper *
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.

■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature

This feature activates while the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
the number of wiper sweeps.

TOC
Controls

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off
within 15 seconds after you remove the key*1 and close the driver's door.
uYou can change the headlight auto off timer setting.

1Headlight Integration with Wiper *

2 Customized Features P. 273

If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 with the headlight switch on, but do
not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch
is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.

Fog Lights *

1Fog Lights *

When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.

Fog Light Switch

When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
They go off when the headlights turn off, or when
the daytime running lights are on.
2 Fog Light Indicator * P. 72

Index

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Home
* Not available on all models

115

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Daytime Running Lights
Models with bulb type parking lights

The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following
conditions have been met:
Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights

The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have
been met:

TOC

Models with LED low beam headlights

Controls

• The power mode is ON.
• The headlight switch is off, or in

.

• The parking brake is released.
Models with halogen low beam headlights

• The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
• The headlight switch is off.
• The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition switch
or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.
Models with bulb type parking lights

The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight
switch is turned on.

Index
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Home

116

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

2013 Accord Coupe

Wipers and Washers

QRG
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ MIST
Pull to
use
washer.

The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.

OFF
INT: Low speed with
intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe

Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.

■ Adjusting the delay
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
delay.
Long delay

HI: High speed wipe
Short delay

■ Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever, the wipers make
two or three more sweeps before stopping.

In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield, becoming stuck.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the
wipers make a single sweep.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s shortest
delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.

TOC
Controls

MIST

NOTICE

Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE

■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI)
Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring

1Wipers and Washers

Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may
stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an
overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a
few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.
If the wipers stop operating due to any obstacle such as
the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place.

Index
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition
switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1, then remove
the obstacle.

Home

117

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Brightness Control
When the parking lights are turned on and the
ignition switch is in ON (w *1, you can use the
brightness control knob to adjust instrument
panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Control Knob

TOC

Dim: Turn the knob to the left.

Controls

You will hear the beeper when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. The
information display will return to its original
state several seconds after you adjust the
brightness.

■ Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the
information display while you are adjusting it.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home

118

1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
Pressing the
display.

(Select/Reset) knob switches the

If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness
display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
parking lights are on.
The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button

2013 Accord Coupe

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window
and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.

QRG
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button
NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.

TOC
Controls

Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.
1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

119

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System *

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Driving Position Memory System *
You can store two driver’s seat positions with the driving position memory system.
When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote, the seat adjusts
automatically to one of the two preset positions.

1Driving Position Memory System *
Using the audio/information screen, you can disable
the automatic seat adjustment function.
2 Customized Features P. 273

• DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
• DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
DRIVER 1

DRIVER 2

TOC
Controls

Index
Home

120

* Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System *

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Storing a Position in Memory
1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the
driver’s seat to the desired position.

Memory
Button 1

2. Press the SET button.
uYou will hear a beep, and the memory
button indicator light will blink.

Memory
Button 2

■ Recalling the Stored Position
Automatic transmission/CVT models

Memory
Button 1
Memory
Button 2

* Not available on all models

1. Move the shift lever to (P .
All models

2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Press a memory button ( (1 or (2 ).
uYou will hear a beep, and the indicator
light will blink.
The seat will automatically move to the
memorized position. When it has finished
moving, you will hear a beep, and the
indicator light stays on.

After you press the SET button, the storing operation
will be canceled when:
• You do not press the memory button within five
seconds.
• You readjust the seat position before the doublebeep.
• You set the power mode to any position except
ON.

TOC
Controls

SET Button

3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2
within five seconds of pressing the SET
button.
uOnce the seat position has been
memorized, the indicator light on the
button you pressed stays on.

1Storing a Position in Memory

1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat will stop moving if you:
• Press the SET button, or a memory button ( (1 or
(2 ).
• Adjust the seat position.

•

Automatic transmission/CVT models

Shift into any position except (P .

•

Manual transmission models

Release the parking brake.

Index
Home

121

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

QRG

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
To adjust

Controls

Home

122

1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.

TOC

Index

2013 Accord Coupe

Adjusting the Steering Wheel

Lever

To lock

3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
down to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
start driving.

Adjusting the Mirrors
2013 Accord Coupe

Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.

■ Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions *
Tab

Up

Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.

QRG
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 125

TOC
Controls

Daytime
Position
Down
Night Position

■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
When driving after dark, the automatic
dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare
from headlights behind you. Press the auto
button to turn this function on and off. When
activated, the auto indicator comes on.
Indicator

Auto Button

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in (R .

Sensor

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

123

uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Power Door Mirrors
Selector Switch

You can adjust the door mirrors when the
ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.

TOC

Adjustment Switch

Controls

Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.

■ Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Outer Segment

The driver side door mirror has outer and inner
segments.
The outer segment is slightly curved to provide
a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror.
This wider view may help you check areas that
are not visible using a standard door mirror.

Inner Segment
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home

124

1Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side
door mirror appear smaller than objects in the rest of
the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they
appear.
Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side
and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.

Adjusting the Seats
2013 Accord Coupe

Adjusting the Seat Positions
Allow sufficient
space.

Move back.

QRG

■ Adjusting the driver’s power seat *

Horizontal Position
Adjustment

1Adjusting the Seats

3 WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.

Lumbar Support
Adjustment

TOC
Controls

Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger's seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.

Always make seat adjustments before driving.

Height Adjustment

Seat-back Angle
Adjustment

Index
Home

* Not available on all models

Continued

125

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Adjusting the front manual seat(s)

1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Height Adjustment
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.

TOC
Controls
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to
change the angle.

Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.

Index
Home

126

Driver’s seat is shown.

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.

TOC
Controls

The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.

3 WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.

Index
Home
Continued

127

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Adjusting the Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints
in all seating positions.

TOC
Controls

Position head in the center
of the head restraint.

Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant's head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant's ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.

■ Adjusting the front head restraint positions
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down
while pressing the release button.

Index
Home

128

1Adjusting the Head Restraints

3 WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
For a head restraint system to work properly:

• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.

• Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.

• Install each restraint in its proper location.

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Positions
A passenger sitting in the center back seating
position should adjust the height of their head
restraint to an appropriate position before the
vehicle begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.

TOC

■ Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

Controls

To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints

3 WARNING

Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.

Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
To remove the rear outer headrestraints, fold down
the seat-back first.
2 Folding Down the Rear Seat P. 132

Index
Home
Continued

129

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.

TOC
Controls

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

Index
Home

130

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.

uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Rear Seat Access

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
Driver side
Models with driver’s power seat

Pulling up the fold-down lever tilts the seatback forward.

When you enter the rear seat, be careful not to trip
over the front seat belt.
If necessary, move the seat forward after tilting the
seat-back forward.

TOC

Models with driver’s manual seat

Controls

Fold-down
Lever

Pulling up on the seat-back angle adjustment
lever tilts the seat-back forward.

Seat-back Angle
Adjustment Lever
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment Lever

Release Lever

Passenger side

Pulling up on the seat-back angle adjustment
lever, or pushing down the front passenger
seat-back release lever tilts the seat-back
forward.
You can also use these levers to move the seat
forward.

Index
Home

131

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Rear Seats
■ Folding Down the Rear Seat
1. Remove the center shoulder belt from the
guide.
Guide

TOC
Controls

2. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release
the lock.

If the rear head restraints get caught on the
front seat-backs, remove the head restraints.
2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 129

Home

132

To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until
it locks.
When returning a seat-back to its original position,
push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder
belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the
center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press
against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 48

3. Fold the seat-back down.

Index

The rear seat-back can be folded down to
accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the
trunk lid open.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 62

Center
Shoulder Belt

Release
Lever

1Folding Down the Rear Seat

Also make sure all items in the trunk or items
extending through the opening into the rear
seat is properly secured. Loose items can fly
forward if you have to brake hard.
The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they
do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold
down.

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
2013 Accord Coupe

Interior Lights

QRG

■ Interior Light Switches

1Interior Light Switches

■ ON
Off

Door Activated Position

The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.

■ Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:

Door Activated
Position
On

but do not open a door.
Models with smart entry system

• When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF

• You unlock the driver's door.
Models without smart entry system

Off

Models without smart entry system

• When you remove the key from the ignition switch

• You remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Models with smart entry system

• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).

(LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Customized Features P. 273

TOC
Controls

• When either of the doors are opened.

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out
and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
• When you unlock the driver's door but do not open it.

The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
• When you lock the driver's door.
• When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
Models without smart entry system

• When you close the driver's door with the key in

■ OFF

the ignition switch.

The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.

Models with smart entry system

• When you close the driver's door in ACCESSORY
mode.
If you leave either door open without the key in the
ignition switch*1, the interior lights go off after about
15 minutes.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE
START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued

Index
Home

133

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Map Lights
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.

TOC
Controls

Index
Home

134

1Map Lights
When the ceiling light switch is in the door activated
position and either door is open, the map light will
not go off when you press the lens.

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

2013 Accord Coupe

Interior Convenience Items

QRG

■ Glove Box

1Glove Box

Pull the handle to open the glove box.

Glove Box

You can lock the glove box with the master
key or the built-in key.

Handle

3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.

TOC
Controls

To Lock

■ Console Compartment
Pull the handle to open the console
compartment.

Index
Home
Continued

135

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Center Pocket *
Pull the handle to open the pocket.

TOC

Handle

Controls

Index
Home

136

* Not available on all models

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Beverage Holders

1Beverage Holders
NOTICE

■ Front seat beverage holders

Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and
electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.

TOC
Controls

■ Rear seat beverage holders

Index
Home
Continued

137

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Accessory Power Sockets

1Accessory Power Sockets

The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY
(q or ON (w *1.
■ Accessory power socket (console panel)
Open the cover to use it.

Controls

To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.

■ Accessory power socket (console
compartment)
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Home

138

This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts or less (15 amps).

TOC

Index

NOTICE

Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.

When both sockets are being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories should not exceed
180 watts (15 amps).

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Coat Hooks

1Coat Hooks

There are coat hooks behind the center pillar
on both sides. Pull them down to use them.

The coat hooks are not designed for large or heavy
items.

TOC
Controls

■ Cargo Hooks

1Cargo Hooks

The cargo hooks in the trunk can be used to
install a net for securing items.

Heavy objects may damage the hook.
Make sure any items put on this hook weigh less than
6.6 lbs (3 kg).
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk,
placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 395

Index
Home
Continued

139

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Sunglasses Holder

1Sunglasses Holder

To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release the indent. To close, push it again until
it latches.
You can store eyeglasses and other small
items in this holder.

TOC
Controls

Index
Home

140

Push

Keep the holder closed while driving except when
accessing stored items.

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Seat Heaters *

1Seat Heaters *

The ignition switch must be in ON (w *1 to use
the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.

3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.

While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
uThe appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on. Briefly press
the switch on the opposite side to turn
the heater off. The indicator will be off.
When a comfortable temperature is
reached, select LO to keep the seat
warm.

TOC
Controls

Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

141

Climate Control System
QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference.

Dashboard vents Dashboard and floor
vents

TOC
Controls

AUTO Button

Floor vents

Floor and
defroster
vents
(Recirculation) Button
Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Control Buttons

Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Buttons
/

(Fan Control) Buttons

A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button

Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control
buttons.
3. Press the
(On/Off) button to cancel.

■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes

Index
Home

142

Press the
(recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior
through the system.
Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.

1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that was pressed will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the
button switches the climate
control system between on and off. When turned on,
the system returns to your last selection.

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Pressing the
button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
Press the
button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.

■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the
2. Press the

TOC
Controls

If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.

1To rapidly defrost the windows

button.
button.

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.

Index
Home

143

uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Synchronized Mode
1Synchronized Mode

When you press the
button, the system changes
to synchronized mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side
temperature and the passenger side temperature can
be set separately.
Models with navigation system

TOC
Controls

The system adjusts each temperature based on the
information of the sunlight sensor and the sun
position updated by the navigation system’s GPS.

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger
side in synchronized mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
u The system will switch to the synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control buttons.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.

Index
Home

144

uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Automatic Climate Control Sensors

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

The automatic climate control system is
equipped with a sunlight sensor and an
interior temperature sensor. Do not cover or
spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight Sensor

TOC
Controls

Temperature
Sensor

Index
Home

145

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Index
Home

146

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System
USB Port .......................................... 149
Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 150
Audio System Theft Protection * ....... 151
Region Setting ................................. 152
Audio Remote Controls.................... 153
Models with one display

Audio System Basic Operation ...... 154
Audio/Information Screen ................ 155
Display Setup ................................... 160
Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 161
Playing a CD .................................... 164
Playing an iPod®............................... 167
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 170
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 172
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 175
* Not available on all models

Models with two displays

Audio System Basic Operation ...... 177
Audio with Touch Screen ................. 178
Audio/Information Screen ................ 181
Display Setup ................................... 187
Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 188
Playing XM® Radio * ......................... 192
Playing a CD .................................... 195
Playing an iPod®............................... 198
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 202
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 205
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 208
Models with navigation system

Audio System Basic Operation ...... 210
Audio with Touch Screen ................. 211
Audio/Information Screen ................ 213

Display Setup................................... 218
Voice Control Operation .................. 219
Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 227
Playing XM® Radio........................... 231
Playing a CD .................................... 234
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio.....237

Playing an iPod® .............................. 247
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 255
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 258
Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 261
Audio Error Messages ...................... 263
General Information on the Audio System.....269

Customized Features........................ 273
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *.. 311
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 313, 350
Compass * .......................................... 388

Index
Home

147

Audio System
QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

About Your Audio System
Models with navigation system

1About Your Audio System

See the Navigation System Manual for information on the navigation system.
The audio system features AM/FM radio and the XM® Radio service *. It can also play
audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, Hard Disc Drive (HDD) audio *, USB flash drives,
and iPod®, iPhone® and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the
icons on the touchscreen interface *.

XM® Radio is available on a subscription basis only.
For more information on XM® Radio, contact a
dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 269
XM® Radio is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
XM® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.

TOC

iPod®

Features

USB Flash
Drive
Remote Controls

Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
iPod® and iPhone® are registered trademarks owned
by Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.

Index
Home

148

* Not available on all models

uuAudio SystemuUSB Port

2013 Accord Coupe

USB Port

QRG
Install the iPod® dock connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB port.

1USB Port

• Do not leave the iPod® or USB flash drive in the
•
•
•
•

TOC
Features

•

vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
We recommend using an extension cable with the
USB port.
Do not connect the iPod® or USB flash drive using a
hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.

If the audio system does not recognize the iPod®, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions
provided with the iPod® or visit www.apple.com/
ipod.

Index
Home

149

uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Auxiliary Input Jack
Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.
Use the jack to connect standard audio
Models with one display
devices.
1. Open the AUX cover.

TOC
Features

Index
Home

150

Models with two
displays
Models with
navigation system

2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
u The audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.

1Auxiliary Input Jack
Models with one display

You can return to the AUX mode by pressing the
AUX button.
Models with two displays
Models with navigation system

You can return to the AUX mode by selecting
Change Source on the Audio menu screen or
Source on the touchscreen.
You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace
the audio system.

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection *

2013 Accord Coupe

Audio System Theft Protection *
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead.

■ Reactivating the audio system
1. Set the power mode to ON, and turn on the audio system.
u If you set the power mode to ACCESSORY, you will be requested to enter the
audio security code. See step 3.

3. Enter the audio security code using the touch screen. If you enter an incorrect
digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not enter code correctly
after 10 tries, leave the system for one hour before trying again, or visit a dealer
to have the system reset.

Find the audio system's security code and serial
number label in your owner’s manual kit.
We recommend that you write down the serial
number in this owner’s manual.
Do not store the label in your vehicle. If you lose the
label, you must first retrieve the serial number, and
then obtain the code.
You can find out about your serial number and
security code from a dealer.

TOC
Features

2. Press and hold the power button again for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the system’s control unit recognizes that
the system is in your vehicle.
If the control unit fails to recognize, Enter PIN Code appears on the audio/
information screen.

QRG
1Audio System Theft Protection *

U.S. models

You can register the security code at Owner Link
(owners.honda.com.), and find information on how
to retrieve the serial number and obtain the code at
radio-navicode.honda.com.

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

151

uuAudio SystemuRegion Setting

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Models with two displays

Region Setting

1Region Setting

The audio system’s region setting will be lost when the battery is disconnected or
goes dead.
If the Region Select screen appears, you need to set the region for the audio
system. Follow the steps below:
1. Press
2. Rotate

TOC
Features

Index
Home

152

to select OK.
to select the region you live in, then press

.

3. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
then press .

to select Yes,

The region setting is required only when the battery
power is temporarily disconnected. It is set to your
vehicle’s region type by the factory.
You cannot change the setting once you have
completed the setting procedure. Contact a dealer if
you selected an incorrect region.

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

2013 Accord Coupe

Audio Remote Controls

QRG

Allows you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FM AM XM * CD HDD * USB iPod®
Button
Bluetooth®
Audio Pandora® * AhaTM* AUX
(+ Button
Button

(- Button

1Audio Remote Controls
The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.

(+ (- (Volume) Buttons
Press (+ : Increases the volume.
Press (- : Decreases the volume.

TOC
Features

Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : Selects the next preset radio station.
Press : Selects the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : Selects the next strong station.
Press and hold : Selects the previous strong station.
• When listening to a CD, HDD *, iPod®, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : Skips to the next song.
Press : Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a CD, HDD * or USB flash drive
Press and hold : Skips to the next folder.
Press and hold : Goes back to the previous folder.
• When listening to Pandora® *
Press : Skips to the next song.
Press and hold : Selects the next station.
Press and hold : Selects the previous station.
* Not available on all models

Index
Home

153

Audio System Basic Operation
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Models with one display

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON (w *1.
Use the selector knob or MENU button to
BACK Button
MENU Button
access some audio functions.
Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.

TOC

Button Selector Knob

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.

Features

MENU button: Press to select any mode.
The available mode includes Change Source,
Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text,
Music Search, and play modes. Play modes
can be also selected from Scan, Random/
Repeat, and so on.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.

Index
Home

154

Press
once and make an adjustment.
uEach time you press
, the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
Press

to select.
to enter.

Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 162
2 Radio text P. 163
2 Music Search P. 165
P. 168
P. 173
2 Scan P. 166
P. 174
2 Random/Repeat P. 166
P. 169
P. 174

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Audio/Information Screen

QRG

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display
Press the

(display) button to change the display.

(Display) Button

Audio

Trip Computer
(Current Drive)

TOC

Audio/Information Screen

Features

Clock/Wallpaper

Trip Computer
(History of Trip A)

Index
Home
Continued

155

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.

■ Trip computer (Current Drive)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.

■ Trip computer (History of Trip A)

TOC
Features

Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip,
as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three
driving cycles.
Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.

■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

Index
Home

156

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.

• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•

2 USB Port P. 149

2. Press the SETTINGS button.

•
•

TOC
Features

3. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Clock,
Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.

in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.

4. Rotate
to select Add New Wallpaper,
then press .
uThe preview of the imported data is
displayed.
5. Rotate
to select a desired picture.
uThe preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
6. Press
to save the data.
uThe confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.
Continued

Index
Home

157

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Select wallpaper

1Wallpaper Setup

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate
to select a desired wallpaper, then press
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate

TOC

to select Set, then press

.

.

Features

■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
5. Rotate

Index
Home

158

From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Preview
and press
to see a preview at full-size screen.

to select OK, then press

to delete completely.

.
To go back to the previous screen, press
OK, or press the BACK button.

to select

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

2013 Accord Coupe

Adjusting the Sound
SETTINGS Button

QRG
1. Press the SETTINGS button.

1Adjusting the Sound

2. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate

Selector Knob

Rotate
choices:

to select Sound, then press

.

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.

to scroll through the following

TOC

Bass

Features

Treble

Fader

Balance

SVC

Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation

Index
Home

159

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness

1Changing the Screen Brightness

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Display.

TOC

3. Rotate
.

to select Brightness, then press

4. Rotate

to adjust the setting.

Features

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Other.
3. Rotate
to select Background Color,
then press .
4. Rotate
to select the setting you want,
then press .

Index
Home

160

You can change the Contrast and Black level
settings in the same manner.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Audio/Information Screen

TOC

VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Seek/Skip Buttons
Press
and
to search up and
down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.

MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.

Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
Tune to the selected station.
Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.

Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio frequency.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

Features

FM/AM Button
Press to select a band.

Index
Home

Continued

161

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Radio Data System (RDS)

1Playing AM/FM Radio

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press
2. Rotate

while listening to an FM station.
to select the station, then press

.

■ Manual update
TOC

Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press
while listening to an FM station.

Features

2. Rotate

to select Refresh, then press

.

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 153
You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU
button and selecting Change Source on the MENU
screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you
store 6 stations each.

1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.

Index
Home

162

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Radio text

1Radio text

Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate

to select Radio Text, then press

.

The text indicator comes on when you received a text
message. The indicator stays on until you read the
message.

■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate

to select Scan, then press

To turn off scan, press

.

to select Stop, or press the BACK button.

TOC
Features

Index
Home

163

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

QRG

Playing a CD

2013 Accord Coupe

Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
Audio/Information Screen

TOC
Features

CD Button
Press to play a CD.
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.

Index
Home

164

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.

CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Seek/Skip Buttons
Press
or
to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a track/file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change tracks/folders.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List

1Playing a CD

(MP3/WMA/AAC)

NOTICE

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate

to select a folder.

4. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
5. Rotate

to select a file, then press

.

Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.

TOC
Features

Folder Selection

WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.

File Selection

Index
Home
Continued

165

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate

to select a mode, then press

Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.

TOC
Features
Random/Repeat is
selected.

■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate

Index
Home

166

.

to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Playing an iPod®

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB Port, then press the AUX
button.
2 USB Port P. 149
Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod® is
connected.
Album Art

TOC
Features

AUX Button
Press to select iPod® (if connected).
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.

Seek/Skip Buttons
Press
or
to change songs.
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change songs.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Continued

Index
Home

167

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1Playing an iPod®
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate
4. Press
5. Rotate

TOC
Features

Index
Home

168

If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 265

to select a menu.
to display the items on that menu.
to select an item, then press

.

uuAudio System Basic Operationu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press .
3. Rotate

to select a mode, then press

.

Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current file.
Shuffle Album: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.

TOC
Features

■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate

to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

.

Index
Home
Continued

169

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
U.S. models
Compatible phones only

Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.

1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.

iPhone

You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.
Make sure the audio setting is correct for the connection type.
2 USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority * P. 292

Press the AUX button to select Pandora mode.

TOC

Audio/Information Screen

Features

Album Art

Rating Icon
Selector Knob
Turn to switch to another station.

AUX Button
Press to select Pandora®.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Skip Button
Press
to skip a song.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

Index
Home

170

USB Indicator
Appears when a phone is
connected.

Preset Button (1)
Press to switch the mode between
pause and resume.
Preset Button (2)
Press to select Like.

MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Preset Button (5)
Press to select Bookmark Artist.
Preset Button (4)
Press to select Bookmark Track.
Preset Button (3)
Press to select Dislike.
* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Pandora® Menu

1Playing Internet Radio
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
(888) 528-7876.

You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Like
• Dislike
• Station List
• Change Source
• Bookmark Track
• Bookmark Artist
• Play/Pause

Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that
selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user
enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.

■ Operating a menu item
to select an item, then press

Features

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate

TOC

If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system,
it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure
Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected.

.
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 266
There are restrictions on the number of songs you
can skip or dislike in a given hour.

Index
Home

171

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

QRG

Playing a USB Flash Drive

2013 Accord Coupe

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Port P. 149
Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is
connected.

TOC
Features

AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display.

172

MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change folders.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

Index
Home

Seek/Skip Buttons
Press
or
to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a file.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate

to select a folder.

4. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
5. Rotate

to select a file, then press

.

Folder Selection

Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 269
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 265

TOC
Features

File Selection

Index
Home
Continued

173

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate

to select a mode, then press

Random/Repeat is
selected.

TOC
Features

■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate

Index
Home

174

to select the mode you want to turn off, then press

.

.

Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

2013 Accord Coupe

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

QRG

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 321
Audio/
Information
Screen

Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
1-888-528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.

VOL/
(Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.

TOC
Features

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
AUX Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.

Skip Buttons
Press
or
to change files.

Preset Button (1)
Press to resume
playing a file.
Preset Button (2)
Press to pause a
playing file.

MENU Button
Press to display
the menu items.

Index
Home

Continued

175

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Press the AUX button.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.

TOC
Features

2. Rotate

to select Play or Pause, then press

.

1Switching to HFL

2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 313

Press the
(hang-up/back) button to end
the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.

Button

176

If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
jack, you may need to press the AUX button
repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.

1. Press the MENU button.

Press the
(pick-up) button on the steering
wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio
is playing.

Home

The pause function may not be available on some
phones.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.

■ To pause or resume a file

■ Switching to HFL

Index

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.

Button

If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the
pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.

Audio System Basic Operation
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Models with two displays

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Use the selector knob, DISP and BACK
DISP (SETTINGS) Button
buttons to access some audio functions.

These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
Press

Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Selector Knob
Button

BACK Button

BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.

Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 190
2 Save Preset P. 189
P. 194
2 Radio text P. 191
2 Music Search P. 196
P. 200
P. 206
2 Scan P. 197
P. 207

TOC
Features

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
Also press to select any mode. The available
mode includes Change Source, Station List,
Save Preset, Radio Text, Music Search, and
play modes. Play modes can be also selected
from Scan, Random/Repeat, and so on.

to select.
to enter.

2 Random/Repeat P. 197
P. 201
P. 207

button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press
once and make an adjustment.
uEach time you press
, the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.

Index
Home

177

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Audio with Touch Screen
Use the touch screen to operate the audio system.

1Audio with Touch Screen
Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source
selected.

■ Selecting an Audio Source

Select X to go back to the previous screen.

Select Source.

Use the

TOC
Features

Source List Icons

Select Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

■ Displaying the Menu Items

Select More.

Index
Home

178

Select More to display the menu items.

Menu Items

/

/

/

icons to turn the page.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Changing the Clock/Screen Settings
Select

Select

1Changing the Clock/Screen Settings

to adjust the clock and screen settings.

■ Changing the Clock settings

TOC
Features

The followings are adjustable screen settings:
• Brightness
• Contrast
• Black Level
• Display
Changes between the daytime or nighttime
modes.
• Beep
Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the
screen.
• Keyboard
Changes the on-screen keyboard from the
alphabetical order to the qwerty type.
• Blackout
Sets the screen black out timing.

.

2 Setting the Clock P. 84

■ Changing the Screen settings
1. Select Screen Settings.
2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.

Index
Home
Continued

179

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Adjusting the Sound

1Adjusting the Sound

1. Select More, then Sound Settings.

Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 186

2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.

TOC
Features

■ Displaying the Phone Operation Screen
Select

Select

.

to switch to the phone operation screen.

2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 313

Index
Home

180

1Displaying the Phone Operation Screen
The phone operation screen is available when a
phone is paired to HFL.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Audio/Information Screen

QRG

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display
Using the

Press the

button

(display) button to change the display.

(Display) Button

Audio

Trip Computer
(Current Drive)

TOC
Features

Audio/Information Screen

Clock/Wallpaper

Trip Computer
(History of Trip A)

Index
Home
Continued

181

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Using the DISP button

Function Change Screen
DISP Button

TOC
Features

Selector Knob

Press the DISP button to go to the Function Change screen.
Rotate
to select Audio, Phone, Info or Setting and press

.

■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.

■ Phone
Shows the HFL information. 2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 313

Index
Home

182

■ Setting
Enters the customizing menu screen. 2Customized Features P. 273

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Info
Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper information.
Press , rotate
to select an item, then press .

■ Trip computer (Current Drive)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.

■ Trip computer (History of Trip A)
Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip,
as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three
driving cycles.

TOC
Features

Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.

■ Deleting the history manually
1. Press
2. Rotate

on the History of Trip A screen.
to select Delete History, then press

.

3. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
then press .

to select Yes,

■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

Index
Home
Continued

183

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.

• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•

2 USB Port P. 149

TOC
Features

2. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the
Settings screen.
3. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Clock,
Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
4. Rotate
to select Add New, then press .
uThe picture name is displayed on the list.
5. Rotate
to select a desired picture.
uThe preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.

Index
Home

184

6. Press
to save the data.
uThe confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.

•
•

in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

■ Select wallpaper
1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the Settings screen.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.

QRG
1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Preview
and press
to see a preview at full-size screen.

3. Rotate
to select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
4. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

TOC
Features

5. Rotate
to select Set, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the Settings screen.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
4. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
6. Rotate
to select OK, then press
to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

To go back to the previous screen, press
OK, or press the BACK button.

to select

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.

Index
Home

185

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Adjusting the Sound
DISP (SETTINGS) Button

1. Press and hold the DISP button.

1Adjusting the Sound

2. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Sound, then press

.

Selector Knob
BACK Button

TOC

Rotate
choices:

to scroll through the following

Features

Bass

Treble

Fader

Balance

SUBW

Index
Home

186

SVC

Subwoofer
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

2013 Accord Coupe

Display Setup

QRG

You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness

1Changing the Screen Brightness

1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the
Settings screen.

You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.

2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Display.
3. Rotate
to select Brightness, then
press .

TOC
Features

4. Rotate

to adjust the setting.

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the
Settings screen.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Other.
3. Rotate
to select Background Color,
then press .
4. Rotate
to select the setting you want,
then press .

Index
Home

187

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Playing AM/FM Radio
Audio/Information Screen

TOC
Features

Audio with Touch Screen

Source
Select to change a band or change
an audio source.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Tune Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to tune the radio
frequency.
Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

Presets
Select to store a station.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to search up and
down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.

Index
Home

188

To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-6 (AM) or 1-12 (FM).

More
Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Preset Memory

1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
Selector Knob

2. Press
3. Rotate

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select Save Preset, then press

.

4. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then
press .
Audio with Touch Screen

Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 153
You can also switch the mode by pressing
and
selecting Change Source on the Audio menu
screen.

TOC
Features

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.

2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

Index
Home
Continued

189

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Radio Data System (RDS)

1Radio Data System (RDS)

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press

TOC
Features

Index
Home

190

to switch to the Audio menu screen while listening to an FM station.

2. Rotate

to select Station List, then press

3. Rotate

to select the station, then press

.
.

■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu screen while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate

to select Station List, then press

3. Rotate

to select UPDATE LIST, then press

.
.

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Radio text

1Radio text

Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu screen.
2. Rotate

to select Radio Text, then press

.

The text indicator comes on when you received a text
message. The indicator stays on until you read the
message.

■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
Selector Knob

1. Press
2. Rotate

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select Scan, then press

.

TOC

to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.

Features

To turn off scan, press
Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Scan.
To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.

Index
Home

191

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio *

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Playing XM® Radio *
Audio/Information Screen

TOC
Features

Audio with Touch Screen

Source
Select to change an audio source.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Category Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to display and select
an XM® Radio category.
Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

Presets
Select to store a station.

Index
Home

192

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to the previous
or next channel.
In channel mode, select and hold to
change the channel rapidly.
To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-12.

More
Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio *

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To Play the XM® Radio

1Playing XM® Radio *
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

1. Select the XM® mode.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 153
2 Audio with Touch Screen P. 178

There may be instances when XM® Radio does not
broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This
does not indicate a problem with your audio system.

Selector Knob

2. Press
3. Rotate

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select XM Tune Mode, then press

.

4. Rotate

to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press

5. Rotate

to select Channel List, then press

6. Rotate

to select a channel from a list, then press

.

TOC

.

Features

.

Audio with Touch Screen

2. Select More.
3. Select Tune Mode.
4. Select CH Channel Mode or CAT Category Mode.
5. Select a channel using the , ,
,
icons on the tune mode screen or the
preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

Continued

193

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio *

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Preset Memory

1Playing XM® Radio *
You can store 12 XM® stations into the preset
memory.

To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
Selector Knob

2. Press
3. Rotate

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select Save Preset, then press

.

4. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then
press .

TOC

Audio with Touch Screen

Features

2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

Index
Home

194

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

Playing a CD

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
Audio/Information Screen

CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.

TOC
Features

Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder in MP3, WMA,
or AAC.

(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.

Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select to change an audio source.

Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track/file.

More
Select to display the menu items.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.

Index
Home

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes® are playable on this unit.

Continued

195

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List

1Playing a CD

(MP3/WMA/AAC)

NOTICE

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.

1. Press . Rotate
to select Music
Search, then press .

WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.

TOC
Features

Folder Selection

2. Rotate

to select a folder.

3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.

File Selection

4. Rotate

Index
Home

196

to select a file, then press

.

If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
Selector Knob

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate

to select a mode, then press

Random/Repeat is selected.

1. Select More.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.

Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.

TOC
Features

Audio with Touch Screen

.

3. Select a mode.

■ To turn off a play mode
Random/Repeat is selected.

Selector Knob

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to
turn off, then press .
Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

Index
Home

197

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

QRG

Playing an iPod®

2013 Accord Coupe

Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod
mode.
2 USB Port P. 149
Audio/Information Screen

Album Art

TOC
Features

Audio with Touch Screen

Album Bar
Select to search for an album.

Album Art Icon
Source
Select to change an audio source.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Index
Home

198

More
Select to display the menu items.

Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select an Album

1How to Select an Album
You cannot select an album while the vehicle is
moving.
Select X to go back to the previous screen.

Select an album
image.
Select the
album bar.
Album Bar

Album AAA
Artist AAA

Album Image

TOC
Features

1. Select the album bar.
u The image of the current album is displayed.
2. Select or icon to search for an album.
u When the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.

Index
Home
Continued

199

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.

1. Press . Rotate
to select Music
Search, then press .
2. Rotate
3. Press
4. Rotate

TOC

Folder Selection

Features
File Selection

Index
Home

200

to select a menu.
to display the items on that menu.
to select an item, then press

.

If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 265

uuAudio System Basic Operationu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
Selector Knob

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press .
3. Rotate

to select a mode, then press

.

TOC
Features

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Shuffle/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

■ To turn off a play mode
Selector Knob

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want
to turn off, then press .
Audio with Touch Screen

Index

1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

Home
Continued

201

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
U.S. models
Compatible phones only

Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.

1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.

iPhone

You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.
Make sure the audio setting is correct for the connection type.
2 USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority * P. 292

Select Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.

TOC

Audio/Information Screen

Features

Album Art

USB Indicator
Appears when a phone is
connected.
Rating Icon

Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select Pandora® or AhaTM.

Index
Home

202

Station Up/Down Icons
Select to change a station.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.
Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a song.
More
Select to display the menu items.

Skip Icon
Select to skip a song.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Pandora® Menu

1Playing Internet Radio
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
(888) 528-7876.

You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Like
• Dislike
• Station List
• Change Source
• Bookmark Track
• Bookmark Artist
• Play/Pause

Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that
selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user
enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.

■ Operating a menu item

to select an item and press

.

Features

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate

TOC

If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system,
it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure
Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected.
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 266
There are restrictions on the number of songs you
can skip or dislike in a given hour.

Index
Home
Continued

203

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ AhaTM Menu

1AhaTM Menu

You can operate some of the AhaTM menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.
The available items are:
• Like
• 15sec Back
• Play/Pause
• 30sec Skip
• Stations
• View text
• Change Source
• View list
• Dislike

TOC

■ Operating a menu item

Features

to select an item and press

Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 AhaTM P. 268

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate

AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that
organizes your favorite web content into live radio
stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio,
location-based services, and audio updates from
social media sites.

.

The menu items vary depending on the station you
selected.
To use this service in your vehicle, the HondaLink app
must be installed on your phone. Visit
owners.honda.com/apps for more information.
You must have a previously set up Aha account prior
to using the service in your vehicle. Visit
www.aharadio.com for more information.

Index
Home

204

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

2013 Accord Coupe

Playing a USB Flash Drive

QRG

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port P. 149

Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive
is connected.

TOC

Source
Select to change an audio source.

Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
More
Select to display the menu items.

Features

Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder.

Audio with Touch Screen

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a file.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

Index
Home

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.

Continued

205

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List

1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 269

1. Press . Rotate
to select Music
Search, then press .
2. Rotate

to select a folder.

3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate

TOC

Folder Selection

Features
File Selection

Index
Home

206

to select a file, then press

.

Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 265

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
Selector Knob

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate

to select a mode, then press

Random/Repeat is selected.

TOC
Features

Audio with Touch Screen

.

Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

1. Select More.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

■ To turn off a play mode
Random/Repeat is selected.

Selector Knob

1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want
to turn off, then press .
Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

Index
Home

207

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 321
Audio/
Information
Screen

Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.

TOC
Audio with Touch Screen

Source
Select to change
an audio source.
Folder Up/Down
Icons
Select
or
to
change folder.

Pause Icon

Selector Knob
Press and turn to
select an item,
then press to set
your selection.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to
change files.

Home

208

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
1-888-528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

VOL/
(Volume/Power)
Knob
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.

Index

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

More
Select to display
the menu items.
Play Icon

BACK Button
Press to go back to
the previous display.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.

TOC

■ To pause or resume a file
Selector knob

1. Press
2. Rotate

to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select Play or Pause, then press

.

Audio with Touch Screen

Select the play icon or pause icon.

■ Switching to HFL

1Switching to HFL

Press the
(pick-up) button on the steering
wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio
is playing.

If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the
pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.

2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 313

Press the
(hang-up/back) button to end
the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.

Button
Button

Index
Home

209

Audio System Basic Operation
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Models with navigation system

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Use the interface dial or MENU button to
BACK Button
MENU Button
access some audio functions.
Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.

Button

TOC

Interface Dial

Interface dial: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection. Move right, left, up or down to
select secondary menu.
MENU button: Press to select any mode. The
available mode includes Change Source,
Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text,
Music Search, and play modes. Play modes
can be also selected from Scan, Random/
Repeat, and so on.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.

Index
Home

210

button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press
once and make an adjustment.
uEach time you press
, the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and off mode.

Voice Control System
The audio system is voice operable. See the
navigation system manual for details.
These indications are used to show how to operate
the interface dial.
Rotate

to select.

Press

to enter.

Move

,

,

or

to select secondary menu.

Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 229
2 Save Preset P. 228
P. 233
2 Radio text P. 230
2 Music Search P. 235
P. 239
P. 249
P. 259
2 Scan P. 236
P. 240
P. 260
2 Random/Repeat P. 236
P. 240
P. 250
P. 260

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Audio with Touch Screen

QRG

Use the touch screen to operate the audio system.

1Audio with Touch Screen
Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source
selected.

■ Selecting an Audio Source

Select X to go back to the previous screen.

Select Source.

Use the

/

/

/

icons to turn the page.

TOC
Select Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.

Features

Source List Icons

■ Displaying the Menu Items

Select More.

Menu Items

Index

Select More to display the menu items.

Home
Continued

211

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Adjusting the Sound

1Adjusting the Sound

1. Select More, then Sound Settings.

Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 217

2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.

TOC
Features

■ Changing the Screen Settings
1. Select More, then Screen Settings.
2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.

1Changing the Screen Settings
The followings are adjustable screen settings:

• Brightness
• Contrast
• Black Level
• Display
Changes between the daytime or nighttime
modes.
• Beep
Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the
screen.
• Keyboard
Changes the on-screen keyboard from the
alphabetical order to the qwerty type.
• Blackout
Sets the screen black out timing.

Index
Home

212

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe

Audio/Information Screen

QRG

Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display
Press the

1Switching the Display
You can also use the AUDIO, NAV, PHONE and
INFO buttons to go to the corresponding display.

(display) button to change the display.

(Display) Button

Audio

Navigation

TOC
Features

Audio/Information Screen

Info
PHONE Button

INFO Button

NAV Button

AUDIO Button

Phone

Index
Home
Continued

213

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.

■ Navigation
Shows the navigation screen. 2Refer to the Navigation System Manual

■ Phone
Shows the HFL information. 2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 350

■ Info
TOC

Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper and other information. Rotate
to select an item, then press .

Features

■ Trip computer (Current Drive)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.

■ Trip computer (History of Trip A)
Shows the range, average fuel economy and distances traveled for the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three driving cycles.
Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.

■ Deleting the history manually

Index
Home

214

1. Move on the History of Trip A screen to select Delete History, then press .
2. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
to select Yes,
then press .

■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.

• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•

2 USB Port P. 149

2. Press the SETTINGS button.

•
•

TOC
Features

3. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Clock,
Clock/Wallpaper Type.

in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 6 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.

4. Move
to select Wallpaper.
uThe screen will change to the wallpaper
list.
5. Move

to select Add New, then press

.

6. Rotate
to select a desired picture.
uThe preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
7. Press , then move to select Start
Import.
uThe confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.
Continued

Index
Home

215

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Select wallpaper

TOC

1Wallpaper Setup

Features

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type.
3. Move
to select Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Rotate
to select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
5. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Rotate
to select Set, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Preview
and press
to see a preview at full-size screen.

■ Delete wallpaper

Index
Home

216

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type.
3. Move
to select Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
5. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
7. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

.

To go back to the previous screen, press
OK, or press the BACK button.

to select

When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

2013 Accord Coupe

Adjusting the Sound

QRG
1. Press the SETTINGS button.

1Adjusting the Sound

2. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate

to select Sound, then press

.

The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.

SETTINGS Button

Rotate
choices:

to scroll through the following

TOC
Features

Bass

Treble

Fader

Balance

SUBW

SVC

Subwoofer
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation

Index
Home

217

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness

1Changing the Screen Brightness

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Brightness, then
press .

TOC

4. Rotate

to adjust the setting.

Features

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Background Color,
then press .
4. Rotate
to select the setting you want,
then press .

Index
Home

218

You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

2013 Accord Coupe

Voice Control Operation

QRG

Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation of most of
the navigation system functions.
The voice control system uses the
(Talk) and
(hang-up/back) buttons on the
steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

1Voice Control Operation

■ Voice Recognition

1Voice Recognition

To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the navigation voice control
system:

• Close the windows and moonroof.
• Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling.

The voice control system can only be used from the
driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes
noises from the front passenger’s side.

TOC
Features

• Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using.

When you press the
button, a helpful prompt asks
what you would like to do. Press and release the
button again to bypass this prompt and give a
command.

• Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
• Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
• Refer to the Voice Help feature.
2 Refer to the navigation System Manual

Index
Home
Continued

219

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Voice Portal Commands
The system accepts these commands on the
Voice Portal screen.
• Call Your contact name
• Call Phone Number
• Find nearest POI category name
• Go home
• Route menu
• Cancel route

TOC
Features

Home

220

■ On Screen Commands

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

■ Phone Commands

■ Info Commands

The system accepts these commands on any
screen.
• Call by number
• Call by name

The system accepts these commands on any
screen.
• Trip computer
• Traffic information
• Display clock
• Display wallpaper

Contacts that are imported from your
phone to the vehicle are all made available
by voice. Voice Tags can also be recorded
for each of your Speed Dial entries.

Index

■ Navigation Commands

When the
(Talk) button is pressed,
available voice commands appear on the
screen.
For a complete list of commands, say “Voice
Help” after the beep.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

2013 Accord Coupe

■ Climate Control Commands

Driver temperature up
Driver temperature down
Passenger temperature up
Passenger temperature down
Temperature max heat
Temperature max cool
Driver temperature max heat
Driver temperature max cool
Passenger temperature max heat
Passenger temperature max cool
Climate control sync on*1
Climate control sync off*1

*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so
the command may not match your intended action.

■ Audio Commands
The system accepts these commands on
most screens.

QRG

■ Song By VoiceTM commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Music search
List album (specify album)
List artist (specify artist)
List composer (specify composer)
List genre (specify genre)
List playlist (specify playlist)
Play album (specify album)
Play artist (specify artist)
Play composer (specify composer)
Play genre (specify genre)
Play playlist (specify playlist)
Play song (specify song)
What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?

TOC
Features

The system accepts these commands on
most screens.
• Climate control automatic*1
• Climate control off*1
• Air conditioner on*1
• Air conditioner off*1
• Climate control defrost on*1
• Climate control defrost off*1
• Rear defrost on*1
• Rear defrost off*1
• Climate control fresh air
• Climate control recirculate
• Climate control vent
• Climate control bi-level
• Climate control floor
• Climate control floor and defrost
• Fan speed up
• Fan speed down
• Fan speed # (#: 1 to 7)
• Temperature # degrees (#: 57 to 87°F, 15
to 29°C)
• Driver temperature # degrees (#: 57 to
87°F, 15 to 29°C)
• Passenger temperature # degrees (#: 57
to 87°F, 15 to 29°C)
• Temperature up
• Temperature down

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

■ Using Song By VoiceTM
Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you
to select music from your Hard Disc Drive or
iPod® device using your voice.
To activate this mode, you must press the
(Talk) button on the Voice Portal screen
and say:“Music search.”

Index
Home
Continued

221

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

TOC
Features

■ HDD commands

■ Radio commands

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Hard Disc Drive play
Hard Disc Drive play track # (#: 1 to 30)
Hard Disc Drive skip forward
Hard Disc Drive skip back
Hard Disc Drive album up*2
Hard Disc Drive album down*2
Hard Disc Drive track up
Hard Disc Drive track down
Hard Disc Drive playlist up*2
Hard Disc Drive playlist down*2
Hard Disc Drive track random*1
Hard Disc Drive track repeat*1
Hard Disc Drive track scan*1
Hard Disc Drive normal play
What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?

*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so
the command may not match your intended action.

Index
Home

222

*2: These commands are available only in the
corresponding playback mode. For example, “Artist”
commands are available only in “Artist” mode.

•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Audio on*1
Audio off*1
Radio on*1
Radio off*1
Radio select FM
Radio select AM
Radio tune to # FM
(#: frequency from 87.7 to 107.9)
Radio tune to # AM
(#: frequency from 530 [five thirty] to
1710 [seventeen ten])
Radio seek up
Radio seek down
Radio next station
Radio preset # (#: 1 to 12)
Radio FM preset # (#: 1 to 12)
Radio AM preset # (#: 1 to 6)
Radio scan*1
Radio select XM
XM channel #
(#: 0 to 255 [two fifty five])
XM channel down
XM category up
XM category down
XM preset # (#: 1 to 12)
XM scan*1
XM category mode
XM channel mode

*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so
the command may not match your intended action.

NOTE:
Radio volume levels cannot be controlled
using voice control.

■ Disc commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Disc play
Disc play track # (#: 1 to 30)
Disc skip forward
Disc skip back
Disc track random*1
Disc track repeat*1
Disc track scan*1
Disc folder up
Disc folder down
Disc folder random*1
Disc folder repeat*1
Disc folder scan*1
Disc normal play
*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so
the command may not match your intended action.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

2013 Accord Coupe

■ iPod® commands

■ USB commands

■ Bluetooth® Audio commands

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so
the command may not match your intended action.

USB play
USB play track # (#: 1 to 30)
USB skip forward
USB skip back
USB track random*1
USB track repeat*1
USB track scan*1
USB folder up
USB folder down
USB folder random*1
USB folder repeat*1
USB folder scan*1
USB normal play

*1: These commands toggle the function on and off, so
the command may not match your intended action.

Bluetooth Audio play
Bluetooth Audio skip forward
Bluetooth Audio skip back
Bluetooth Audio group up
Bluetooth Audio group down
Bluetooth Audio pause
Bluetooth Audio resume
Bluetooth Audio track random
Bluetooth Audio track repeat

NOTE:
Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work
on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio
devices.

TOC
Features

iPod play
iPod play track # (#: 1 to 30)
iPod skip forward
iPod skip back
iPod track shuffle*1
iPod album shuffle*1
iPod track repeat*1
iPod normal play
What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?

QRG

■ AUX commands
• Auxiliary play

Index
Home
Continued

223

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

TOC
Features

Index
Home

224

■ Pandora® commands
The system accepts these commands while
the Pandora® is playing.
• Pandora play
• Pandora skip forward
• Pandora station up
• Pandora station down
• Pandora pause
• Pandora resume
• Pandora thumbs up
• Pandora thumbs down

■ AhaTM commands
The system accepts these commands while
the AhaTM is playing.
• Aha radio play
• Aha radio skip forward
• Aha radio skip back
• Aha radio station up
• Aha radio station down
• Aha radio resume
• Aha radio pause
• Aha radio like
• Aha radio dislike

■ Internet service commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Internet service play
Internet service skip forward*1
Internet service skip back*1
Internet service station up*1
Internet service station down*1
Internet service resume*1
Internet service pause*1
Internet service like*1
Internet service dislike*1

*1: The system accepts these commands while the
Internet service is playing.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Keyboard Entry Commands
In keyboard screen, letters can be selected
by saying each individual letter or by saying
a keyward phrase. These keyward phrases
are:

■ Letters
Say . . .

Or say . . .
Apple/Alpha
Boy/Bravo
Charlie
Dog/Delta
Edward/Echo
Frank/Foxtrot
George/Golf
Henry/Hotel
Igloo/India
John/Juliet
King/Kilo
Larry/Lima
Mary/Mike
Nancy/November
Oscar
Paul/Papa
Queen/Quebec
Robert/Romeo
Sam/Sierra
Tom/Tango
Uncle/Uniform
Victor
William/Whiskey
X-ray
Yellow/Yankee
Zebra/Zulu

Number . . .
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Or say . . .
Zero
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine

TOC
Features

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z

■ Numbers

Index
Home
Continued

225

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

TOC
Features

Index
Home

226

■ Symbols
Symbol . . .
!
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
~
/
<
>
{
}

■ Accented letters
Or say . . .
Hyphen
Exclamation point
Double Quote
Pound
Dollar
Percent
Ampersand
Apostrophe
Open Parenthesis
Close Parenthesis
Tilde
Slash
Less than
Greater than
Open Brace
Close Brace

Symbol . . .
À
Â
Ä
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Î
Ï
Ô
Ù
Û
Ü

Or say . . .
A grave
A circumflex
A umlaut
C cedilla
E grave
E acute
E circumflex
E umlaut
I grave
I circumflex
I umlaut
O circumflex
U grave
U circumflex
U umlaut

■ Punctuation marks
Symbol . . .
@
^
*
_
`
,
.
?
:
;
+

Or say . . .
At Sign
Caret
Asterisk
Underscore
Back Quote
Comma
Dot
Question mark
Colon
Semicolon
Plus

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.

Presets
Select to store a station.

TOC

Tune Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to tune the radio
frequency.

Features

VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.

Source
Select to change a band or change
an audio source.

More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to search up and
down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.

To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-6 (AM) or 1-12 (FM).

MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to tune the radio
frequency.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
Continued

Index
Home

227

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Preset Memory

1Playing AM/FM Radio
You can control the AM/FM radio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 219

To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
Interface Dial

2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate

to select Save Preset, then press

.

4. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
and hold .

TOC
Features

Audio with Touch Screen

2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

Index
Home

228

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 153
You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU
button and selecting Change Source on the Audio
menu screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Radio Data System (RDS)

1Radio Data System (RDS)

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press the MENU button while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate

to select Station List, then press

3. Rotate

to select the station, then press

When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.

.
.

■ Manual update

TOC

2. Rotate

to select Station List, then press

3. Rotate

to select Refresh, then press

Features

Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press the MENU button while listening to an FM station.
.

.

Index
Home
Continued

229

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Radio text

1Radio text

Display the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate

to select Radio Text, then press

.

■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.

TOC

2. Rotate

to select Scan, then press

Features

To turn off scan, press
Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Scan.
To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.

Index
Home

230

.

to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.

The text indicator comes on when you received a text
message. The indicator stays on until you read the
message.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio

Playing XM® Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Audio/Information Screen

Audio with Touch Screen
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.

Presets
Select to store a station.

To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-12.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.

Category Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to display and select
an XM® Radio category.

TOC
Features

VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.

Source
Select to change an audio source.

More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to the previous
or next channel.
In channel mode, select and hold to
change the channel rapidly.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to tune the radio
frequency.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
Continued

Index
Home

231

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To Play the XM® Radio

1Playing XM® Radio
You can control the XM® radio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 219

1. Select the XM® mode.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 153
2 Audio with Touch Screen P. 211

In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

Interface Dial

2. Press the MENU button.

TOC
Features

3. Rotate

to select XM Tune Mode, then press

.

4. Rotate

to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press

5. Rotate

to select Channel List, then press

6. Rotate

to select a channel from a list, then press

.

.
.

Audio with Touch Screen

2. Select More.
3. Select Tune Mode.
4. Select CH Channel Mode or CAT Category Mode.
5. Select a channel using the , ,
,
icons on the tune mode screen or
the preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.

Index
Home

232

There may be instances when XM® Radio does not
broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This
does not indicate a problem with your audio system.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Preset Memory

1Playing XM® Radio
You can store 12 XM® stations into the preset
memory.

To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
Interface Dial

2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate

to select Save Preset, then press

.

4. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
and hold .

TOC
2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.

Index
Home

233

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

QRG

Playing a CD

2013 Accord Coupe

Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.

Audio/Information Screen
Source
Select to change an audio source.
Audio with Touch Screen

TOC
Features

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.

VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.

CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder in MP3, WMA,
or AAC.
More
Select to display the menu items.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.

Index
Home

234

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track/file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List

1Playing a CD

(MP3/WMA/AAC)

NOTICE

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .

3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a file from the Music Search list.

Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.

TOC
Features

Folder Selection

WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.

You can control a CD audio using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 219
File Selection

Index
Home
Continued

235

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate

TOC

to select a mode, then press

Random/Repeat is selected.

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

Random/Repeat is selected.

■ To turn off a play mode
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want
to turn off, then press .
Audio with Touch Screen

Index

1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

Home

236

.

Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

The Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio function plays tracks from music CDs that have
been recorded onto the built-in HDD. You can arrange the tracks in playlists or play
the tracks using various search methods.

Audio/Information Screen
Source
Select to change an audio source.
Audio with Touch Screen

VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.

TOC
Features

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.

CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Playlist/Album Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next playlist/
album, and
to skip to the
beginning of the previous playlist/
album.
More
Select to display the menu items.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or cancel a setting.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change tracks.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.

Index

SETTINGS Button
Press to go the Setting menu screen.

Home

Continued

237

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Recording a Music CD to HDD

1Recording a Music CD to HDD

The songs on music CDs are automatically recorded by factory default to the HDD
the first time you play each disc. You can then play the songs directly from the HDD.
Recording Indicator

You can add tracks to user playlists, where you can
mix and match tracks from other CDs recorded on
the HDD.
2 Editing an Album or Playlist P. 241
2 Editing Track Information P. 244
If you stop the engine or the power system is turned
off while recording a CD, there may be pauses
between songs when you play back from the HDD.

Recording
Ready to record

Repeat, random, and scan functions are not available
during recording.

TOC
Features

You can play music from other sources (e.g., XM,
HDD, etc.) while recording.

■ Stop Recording
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate

to select Cancel Record to HDD, then press

.

Please note that there is no compensation offered in
the case of unsuccessful recording of audio data or
the loss of audio data due to any cause whatsoever.
Clearing the HDD
Any music tracks stored on the HDD can be deleted.
2 Deleting all HDD Data P. 310

■ Recording a CD Manually

1Recording a CD Manually
Use this feature to set up the music search abilities
when using Song By Voice™ (SBV) commands.

1. Press the MENU button.

Index
Home

238

2. Rotate

to select Rec to HDD, then press

.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a Track from the Music Search List

1How to Select a Track from the Music Search List

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .

Music tracks recorded on HDD cannot be recorded
onto CDs or other devices.
Tracks are recorded at four times the playback speed
using ultra-efficient compression technology;
therefore, sound quality may vary slightly from the
original.
If the HDD is ever replaced, all music data is lost and
cannot be recovered.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the display.
2 Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio P. 264

TOC
Features

3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a track from the Music Search list.
u Title information is displayed if found in
the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®
Media Database) stored on the HDD.
u The HDD has two types of playlists:
original playlists and user playlists. An
original playlist is automatically created
for each album when a music CD is
recorded. You can customize up to six
user playlists provided on the HDD by
adding tracks from your original playlists.

You can control the HDD audio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 219
2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 251

Index
Home
Continued

239

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Albums: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first track in each album.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on HDD.

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track.
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate

TOC

to select a mode, then press

Random/Repeat is selected.

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

Random/Repeat is selected.

■ To turn off a play mode
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want
to turn off, then press .

Index
Home

240

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

.

Random/Repeat
Repeat Album: Repeats all tracks in the current
album.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track.
Random in Album: Plays all tracks in the current
album in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks in random order.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Editing an Album or Playlist

1Editing an Album or Playlist
The maximum number of songs in each of the six
user playlists is 999. Adding new songs overwrites
the oldest songs.

Change the playlist name, album name, genre, and track order of the current
playlist. You can also delete tracks, playlists, and albums.
■ Editing an album
1. Press the MENU button.

The maximum number of original playlists is 999 with
a maximum of 99 songs in each playlist.

2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Albums, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

To delete an album:
Rotate
to select Delete, then press

Deleting an album (original playlist) also deletes the
album tracks you have stored in any user playlists.
Deleting a user playlist or deleting all tracks from a
user playlist does not remove the playlist folder.
The folder retains the playlist name and artist
information.

TOC
Features

4. To edit an album name:
Rotate
to select Edit name, then
press .
u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the audio with touch screen.

Each album CD counts as an original playlist. Adding
a track from a user playlist into the same user playlist
will cause the track to appear twice in the playlist.

.

To edit track information or delete a track:
Rotate
to select List Tracks, then
press .
2 Editing Track Information P. 244

Index
Home
Continued

241

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Editing a playlist
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Playlists, then
press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

TOC
Features

4. To edit a playlist name:
Rotate
to select Edit name, then
press .
u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the audio with touch screen.
To delete a playlist:
Rotate
to select Delete, then press

.

To edit track information or delete a track:
Rotate
to select List Tracks, then
press .
2 Editing Track Information P. 244

Index
Home

242

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Creating a new playlist
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Playlists, then
press .

TOC
Features

4. Rotate
to select Create New Playlist,
then press .
u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the audio with touch screen, then select
tracks from the Music Search list.

Index
Home
Continued

243

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Editing Track Information
Change the track title, artist name, genre and composer. You can also delete tracks.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then
press .
3. Rotate

TOC

to select Tracks, then press

.

4. Rotate
to select a track you want to edit
or delete, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Features

5. To edit track information:
Rotate
to select Edit name, then
press .
u Enter the track name, track artist, etc.
using the interface dial or the audio with
touch screen. Move , rotate
to
select OK, then press .
To delete a track:
Rotate
to select Delete, then press

Index
Home

244

.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Displaying Music Information
Music information (album name, artist name, genre) can be acquired by accessing
the Gracenote® Album Info.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then
press .
3. Rotate

to select Albums, then press

.

5. Rotate
to select Edit name, then
press .

TOC
Features

4. Rotate
to select an album you want to
edit, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

6. Move to select Get Music Info, then
press .
u The system starts to access the
Gracenote® Album Info.

Index
Home
Continued

245

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Updating Gracenote® Album Info
Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote® Media Database) that is included
with the navigation system.
1. Insert the update disc into the disc slot or
connect the USB flash drive that includes
the update.
2. Press the SETTINGS button in the HDD
mode.

TOC
Features

3. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Gracenote Album DB Info Update.
4. Rotate
to select Update from CD or
Update from USB, then press .
u The system starts updating and the
confirmation message appears on the
screen. Press
to finish.

Index
Home

246

1Updating Gracenote® Album Info
To acquire updated files:

• Consult a dealer.
• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com.
• Canada: Visit www.hondanavi.ca.
Once you perform an update, any information you
edited before will be overwritten or erased.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

Playing an iPod®

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod
mode.
2 USB Port P. 149

Audio/Information Screen

USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod® is connected.

Album Art
Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select to change an audio source.

Album Art Icon
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.

TOC
Features

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.

Album Bar
Select to search for an album.
More
Select to display the menu items.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.

Index
Home

Continued

247

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select an Album

1How to Select an Album
You cannot select an album while the vehicle is
moving.
Select X to go back to the previous screen.

Select an album
image.
Select the
album bar.
Album Bar

Album Image

TOC
Features

1. Select the album bar.
u The image of the current album is displayed.
2. Select
or icon to search for an album.
u When the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.

Index
Home

248

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .

You can control an iPod® using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 219
2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 251
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 265

TOC
Features

3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a song from the Music Search list.

Index
Home
Continued

249

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode

You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press .
3. Rotate

to select a mode, then press

.

TOC
Features

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Shuffle/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

■ To turn off a play mode
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to
turn off, then press .

Index
Home

250

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

2013 Accord Coupe

Song By VoiceTM (SBV)

QRG

Use SBV to search for and play music from your HDD or iPod® using voice
commands.

1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Setting options:

• On (factory default): Song By Voice commands are

■ To enable SBV

available.

• Off: Disable the feature.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Song by Voice, then
press .

TOC
Features

4. Rotate
to select On or Off, then
press .

Index
Home
Continued

251

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Searching for music using SBV

1Searching for music using SBV

1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On.
2. Press the
(Talk) button and say “Music
Search” to activate the SBV feature for the
HDD and iPod®.

TOC

3. Press the
button and say a command.
u Example 1: Say “(List) ‘Artist A’“ to view a
list of songs by that artist. Select the
desired song to start playing.
u Example 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’“ to start
playing songs by that artist.

Features

4. To cancel SBV, press the
(hang-up/back)
button on the steering wheel. The selected
song continues playing.
Once you have canceled this mode, you need
to press the
button and say “Music Search”
again to re-activate this mode.

Index
Home

252

Song By VoiceTM Commands List
2 Song By VoiceTM commands P. 221
NOTE:
Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks
stored on the HDD or iPod®.
You can add phonetic modifications of difficult
words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists,
songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 253

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Phonetic Modification

1Phonetic Modification

Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV
to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when
searching for music on the HDD or iPod®.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.

Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By
Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification
items.

2. Rotate
to select System Settings,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select Song by Voice
Phonetic Modification, then press

.

5. Rotate
to select HDD or iPod, then
press .

TOC
Features

4. Move and rotate
to select New
Modification, then press .

Index
Home
Continued

253

uuAudio System Basic Operationu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
6. Rotate
to select the item to modify
(e.g., Artist), then press .
u The list of the selected item appears on
the screen.

TOC
Features

7. Rotate
to select an entry (e.g., No
Name), then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.
u The listen to the current phonetic
modification, rotate
to select Play,
then press .
u To delete the current phonetic
modification, rotate
to select
Delete, then press .
8. Rotate
to select Modify, then
press .
9. Enter the phonetic spelling you wish to
use (e.g., “Artist A”) when prompted.

Index
Home

254

10. Move to select OK to exit.
u The artist “No Name” is phonetically
modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV
mode, you can press the
(Talk)
button and use the voice command
“Play ‘Artist A’” to play songs by the
artist “No Name.”

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
U.S. models

1Playing Internet Radio

Compatible phones only

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.

Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.
iPhone

You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.
Make sure the audio setting is correct for the connection type.
2 USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority * P. 305

Select Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.
Audio/Information Screen

Album Art

Rating Icon

TOC
Features

USB Indicator
Appears when a phone is
connected.

Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select Pandora® or AhaTM.

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.

Station Up/Down Icons
Select to change a station.

Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.

Skip Icon
Select to skip a song.

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

More
Select to display the menu items.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item, then press
to set your selection. Move up, down, right
and left to select secondary menu.
* Not available on all models

Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a song.

Index
Home

Continued

255

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Pandora® Menu

1Playing Internet Radio

You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Skip Forward
• Dislike
• Play/Pause
• Bookmark This Song
• Station List
• Bookmark This Artist
• Like
• Change Source

■ Operating a menu item
TOC
Features

The menu items are shown in the lower half of
the audio/information screen.
Rotate
to select an item and press .
To select Change Source, press the MENU
button, then press .

To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
(888) 528-7876.
Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that
selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user
enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system,
it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure
Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected.
1Pandora® Menu
You can control Pandora® using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 219
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 266

Index
Home

256

There are restrictions on the number of songs you
can skip or dislike in a given hour.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Aha

TM

1AhaTM Menu

Menu

You can operate some of the AhaTM menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.
The available items are:
• Like
• View text
• Dislike
• View list
• Play/Pause
• Reply
• 15sec Back
• Change Source
• 30sec Skip
• Stations

■ Operating a menu item

To select Change Source or Stations, press
the MENU button, then press .

You can control AhaTM using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 219
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 AhaTM P. 268

TOC
Features

The menu items are shown in the lower half of
the audio/information screen.
Rotate
to select an item and press .

AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that
organizes your favorite web content into live radio
stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio,
location-based services, and audio updates from
social media sites.

The menu items vary depending on the station you
selected.
To use this service in your vehicle, the HondaLink app
must be installed on your phone. Visit
owners.honda.com/apps for more information.
You must have a previously set up Aha account prior
to using the service in your vehicle. Visit
www.aharadio.com for more information.

Index
Home

257

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

QRG

Playing a USB Flash Drive

2013 Accord Coupe

Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port P. 149

Audio/Information Screen

TOC

Audio with Touch Screen

Features

(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.

USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive
is connected.
Source
Select to change an audio source.

Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder.
More
Select to display the menu items.

Index
Home

258

BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a file.

Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item, then press
to set your selection. Move up, down, right
and left to select secondary menu.

MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List

1Playing a USB Flash Drive

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .

You can control a USB flash drive using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 219
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 269
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.

Folder Selection

If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 265

TOC
Features

3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a file from the Music Search list.

File Selection

Index
Home
Continued

259

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Select a Play Mode

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.

You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate

TOC

to select a mode, then press

.

Random/Repeat is selected.

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.

Random/Repeat is selected.

■ To turn off a play mode
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to
turn off, then press .

Index
Home

260

Audio with Touch Screen

1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.

Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

2013 Accord Coupe

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

QRG

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 356
Audio/
Information
Screen
Audio with Touch
Screen

Source
Select to change
an audio source.

VOL (Volume)
Knob
Turn to adjust the
volume.

Folder Up/Down
Icons
Select
or
to
change folders.

Pause Icon

Play Icon
More
Select to display
the menu items.

Interface Dial/
ENTER Button
Press and turn to
select an item,
then press to set
your selection.
Move up, down,
right and left to
select secondary
menu.

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
1-888-528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
You can control Bluetooth® Audio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 219

TOC
Features

(Power) Button
Press to turn the
audio system on and
off.

Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change files.
MENU Button
Press to display
the menu items.
Continued

Index
Home

261

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.

TOC

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.

Features

■ To pause or resume a file
Interface Dial

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Play or Pause, then
press .

Audio with Touch Screen

Select the play icon or pause icon.

■ Switching to HFL

1Switching to HFL

Press the
(pick-up) button on the steering
wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio
is playing.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 350

Index
Home

262

Press the
(hang-up/back) button to end
the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.

Button
Button

If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the
pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.

Audio Error Messages
2013 Accord Coupe

CD Player

QRG

If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message
Unplayable File
Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
Push Eject

Cause
Track/file format not supported

Mechanical error

Solution
●

Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.

●

Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
error message is cleared.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.

●

2 Protecting CDs P. 271

Mecha Error

●

Servo error

Check Disc

Disc error

Heat Error

High temperature

●

●

TOC
Features

●

Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual

If the error message reappears, press the
button, and pull out
the disc.
Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact a dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 271

●

Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.

Index
Home

263

uuAudio Error MessagesuHard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Models with navigation system

Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
If an error occurs while playing the Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio, you may see the
following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Navigation system is suspended due to low air pressure.
System will resume when vehicle moves to an area of lower
altitude.
HDD access error.
Please consult your dealer.

TOC
Features

Index
Home

264

Solution
The HDD is inoperable due to low atmospheric pressure. Move
your vehicle to a lower altitude where atmospheric pressure is
higher.
—

The navigation system temperature is too high. For
protection, the system will shut off until it cools down.

Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.

The navigation system temperature is too low. For
protection, the system will shut off until it warms up.

The navigation system has difficulty reading the HDD when the
temperature is below approximately -22°F (-30°C). The navigation
system starts up automatically when the display warms up.

Unplayable File

Appears when a file format not supported. Current track will be
skipped. The next supported track plays automatically.

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod®/USB Flash Drive

2013 Accord Coupe

iPod®/USB Flash Drive

QRG

If an error occurs while playing an iPod® or USB flash drive, you may see the
following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message

Solution
Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the
USB adapter unit.

Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s
Manual

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

Unsupported Version

Appears when an unsupported iPod® is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod® is connected,
update the iPod® software to the newer version.

Connect Retry

Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod®. Reconnect the iPod®.

Unplayable File

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.

TOC
Features

USB Error

iPod®

Appears when the iPod® is empty.
USB flash drive

No Data

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive.
iPod® and USB flash drive

Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.

Index
Home

265

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

U.S. models

Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s Manual

Solution
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect
the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.

Audio/Information Screen

TOC

There is no station list in the device.
Please add the station list to your device.

Features

Audio with Touch Screen

Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device
to create a station.

No stations have been created.
Please create a station on the device.
The time that was able to be reproduced in one month was
exceeded.

Appears when you try to skip a song or select Dislike over the
predetermined number of times in a month.

Audio/Information Screen

Unfortunately our music licenses force us to limit the number
of songs you may skip each hour.
If you want to hear something else, select another station
Appears when you try to skip a song or select Dislike over the
starting with a different artist or song.
predetermined number of times in an hour.
Audio with Touch Screen

Music licenses force us to limit the number of tracks you may
skip each hour.

Index
Home

266

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Error Message

Solution

Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again later.

No data

Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated.
Reboot the app and reconnect the device.

PANDORA ver unsupport

Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update
Pandora® to the latest version.

PANDORA system maintenance

Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again
later.

Cannot connect to PANDORA when stopped. Check your
mobile phone

Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your
device.

TOC
Features

Unable to save rating.
Unable to save bookmark
or
Unable to skip

Index
Home

267

uuAudio Error MessagesuAhaTM

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

U.S. models with the touch screen
TM

Aha

If an error occurs while playing AhaTM, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message

TOC
Features

Index
Home

268

Solution

Cannot connect to HondaLink. When stopped, check your
mobile device.

Appears when the AhaTM app is not activated. Check your device.

Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s Manual

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect
the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it on again.
Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

General Information on the Audio System
2013 Accord Coupe

XM® Radio Service *
■ Subscribing to XM® Radio
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in
the display: Turn the selector knob or the interface dial until 0 appears.
2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the XM®
website to subscribe.

■ Receiving XM® Radio
Switch to the XM® mode by pressing the SOURCE button repeatedly or operating
the audio with touch screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the
service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.

Loading:
XM® is loading the audio or program information.
Ch off air:
The channel is not currently broadcasting.
Ch unauthorized:
XM® radio is receiving information update from the network.

Contact Information for XM® Radio:
US: XM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or
(800) 852-9696
Canada: XM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or
(877) 209-0079
1Receiving XM® Radio
The XM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
• In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
• In tunnels
• On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
• Large items carried on the roof rack

TOC
Features

■ XM® Radio Display Messages

QRG
1Subscribing to XM® Radio

No signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
Ch unavailable:
No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the artist or
title information is unavailable.

Index

Check antenna:
There is a problem with the XM® antenna. Contact a dealer.

Home

* Not available on all models

269

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs

QRG

• Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
• Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
• Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

TOC

Also includes:

Features

■ CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

Index
Home

270

2013 Accord Coupe

Recommended CDs
1Recommended CDs

A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos:
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the
Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks & DTS 2.0 Channel is a
trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.
©DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
• Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
• When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
• Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.

1Protecting CDs
NOTICE

Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
●

• Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs

• Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
Bubbled/
Wrinkled

• Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.

With Label/
Sticker

• Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.

●

Sealed
With Plastic Ring
● Poor quality
Damaged CDs
CDs

Chipped/
Cracked
Small CDs

Warped

TOC
Features

●

Using
Printer Label
Kit

Burrs

3-inch
(8-cm)
CD

Index
Home

271

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod®, iPhone®, and USB Flash Drives

QRG

■ iPod® and iPhone® Model Compatibility

TOC

2013 Accord Coupe

Compatible iPod®, iPhone®, and USB Flash Drives
Model
iPod® (5th generation)
iPod classic® 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic® 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic® 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano® (1st to 6th generation) launch in 2010
iPod touch® (1st to 4th generation) launch in 2010*1
iPhone® 3G/iPhone® 3GS/iPhone® 4/iPhone® 4S*1
iPhone® 3G/iPhone® 4/iPhone® 4S*2

1iPod® and iPhone® Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.

Features

*1: Models with one display
*2: Models with two display or the navigation system

■ USB Flash Drives
• Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher.
• Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
• Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

Index
Home

272

1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.

Customized Features
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

1Customized Features
Models without navigation system

■ How to customize

When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.

Models with one display

to
With the ignition switch is in ON (w *1, press the SETTINGS button. Rotate
select Audio Settings, Phone Settings, Camera Settings, Vehicle Settings,
System Settings or Info Settings and press .

Automatic transmission/CVT models

• Shift to (P .
Manual transmission models

• Set the parking brake.

Audio/Information Screen
To customize other features, rotate
, and press
2 List of customizable options P. 287

.

TOC
Features

SETTINGS Button
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home
Continued

273

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Models with two displays

With the power mode in ON, press and hold the DISP button. Rotate
to select
Audio Settings, Phone Settings, Camera Settings, Vehicle Settings, System
Settings or Info Settings and press .
Audio/Information Screen

TOC
Features
DISP Button

Index
Home

274

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to customize

1Customized Features

Models with navigation system

Models with navigation system

With the power mode in ON, press the SETTINGS button. Rotate
to select
Audio Settings, Phone Settings, Camera Settings, Vehicle Settings, System
Settings, Info Settings, or Navi Settings and press .

When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Automatic transmission/CVT models

• Shift to (P .

Audio/Information Screen

Manual transmission models

• Set the parking brake.
To customize other features, rotate
, move
or , and press .
2 List of customizable options P. 297

,

,

TOC
Features

SETTINGS Button

Index
Home
Continued

275

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Models without navigation system

■ Customization flow
Brightness
Contrast
Black level

Display

Models with one display

Press the SETTINGS button.
Models with two displays

Press and hold the DISP button.

TOC

Beep
Bluetooth
System
Settings

Voice
Recog

Features

Clock

Other

Default

Index
Home

276

Bluetooth On/Off
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Voice Prompt
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type

Clock Type
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Language
Background Color
Header Clock Display
Factory data reset

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
TPMS Calibration
Driver Assist System Setup *

Forward Collision Warning
Distance *

Meter
Setup

Lighting
Setup

Door
Setup

Maintenance Info.
Default

TOC
Features

Vehicle
Settings

Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Keyless Start Guidance Screens *
Memory Position Link
Driving Position Setup *
Keyless
Door Unlock Mode
Access
Setup *
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance Reset

Index
Home

* Not available on all models

Continued

277

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Sound
Source Select Popup
Cover Art
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device
Bluetooth Device List
USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority *

Audio
Settings

Default

TOC
Features

Info
Settings

Clock/
Wallpaper
Type

Clock Type
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format

Default

Index
Home

278

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Connect
Phone

Add Bluetooth Device
Disconnect

Bluetooth
Device
List
Phone
Settings

Phone

TOC
Features

Text
Message*1,
Text/Email*2

Edit Speed Dial
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
Use Contact Photo*2
Enable Text Message*1,
Enable Text/Email*2
Select Account *
New Text Message Alert*1,
New Text/Email Alert*2
Message Auto Reading

Default

*1: Models with one display

Index

*2: Models with two displays

Home
* Not available on all models

Continued

279

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
LaneWatch *

Camera
Settings

TOC

Rear
Camera

Show with Turn Signal
Reference Lines
Display
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Default*1

Features

Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Default

Default

Index

*1: Models with two displays

Home

280

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Models with navigation system

■ Customization flow
Press the SETTINGS button.

Display

System
Settings

Bluetooth

Voice
Recog.

Volume
Interface Dial Feedback
Message Auto Reading
Verbal Reminder
Bluetooth Status
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code

TOC
Features

Default

Sound/
Beep

Brightness
Contrast
Black level

Volume
Voice Prompt
Song by Voice
Song by Phonetic Modification
Phonebook Phonetic Modification

Index
Home
Continued

281

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Clock

Clock/Wallpaper
Type

Clock
Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone *
Auto Daylight *
Clock Reset
Others

TOC
Features

Units
Language
Voice Command Tips
Background Color
Header Clock Display
System Device Information
Factory data reset

Index
Home

282

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

TPMS Calibration
Driver Assist System Setup

Meter
Setup

Driving Position Setup *
Keyless
Access
Setup

Default

Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Keyless Start Guidance Screens

Lighting
Setup

TOC

Memory Position Link

Features

Vehicle
Settings

Forward Collision
Warning Distance

Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto light Sensitivity

Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Door
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Setup
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance Info.
Maintenance Reset

Index
Home

* Not available on all models

Continued

283

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
LaneWatch
Camera
Settings

Default

Rear
Camera

TOC

Show with Turn Signal
Reference Lines
Next Maneuver Pop up
Display
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline

Features

Default
Sound
Source Select Setup
HD Radio Mode
Cover Art
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device
Audio
Settings

Bluetooth Device List
Recording from CD
Recording Quality
HDD Info

Index

Default

Gracenote Album DB Info Update
Update Gracenote Album Info
Delete all HDD Data

Home

284

USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority *
* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Phone

Connect phone

Default

Bluetooth Device
List

Add Bluetooth
Device
Disconnect
Edit Bluetooth
Device
Add Bluetooth
Device

Phone
Settings

Edit Speed Dial
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone

Features

Default

TOC

Automatic Phone Sync
Use Contact Photo
Text/Email

Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Text/Email Alert

Default

Index
Home
Continued

285

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Navi
Settings

See Navigation System Manual.

Clock

Info
Settings

TOC
Features

Others

Clock/Wallpaper Type
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone *
Auto Daylight *
Clock Reset
INFO Screen Preference

Default

Index
Home

286

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ List of customizable options
Models without navigation system

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Display

Selectable Settings

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen.

—

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/information
screen.

—

Black level

Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen.

—

Selects whether a beeper sounds or not when
you operate the selector knob.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth On/Off

Turns the Bluetooth® on and off.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a security PIN.

Beep

Bluetooth

—

2 Phone Setup P. 321

Edit Pairing Code
Voice
Recog

TOC
Features

System
Settings

Description

Voice Prompt

Changes a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 323

Turns the voice prompt on and off.

Random*1/Fixed
Beginner*1/Expert

Index

*1:Default Setting

Home
Continued

287

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Clock Type
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock

TOC

Wallpaper

Features

Other

Index

●
●

Changes the wallpaper type.
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 157

P.184

Analog/Digital*1/
Small Digital/Off
Blank/Galaxy*1/
Metallic/Time Zone/
Add New

Adjust Clock.

—

2 Setting the Clock P. 84

Clock Format

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.

12H*1/24H

Language

Changes the display language.

English*1/French/
Spanish

Background Color

Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen and the audio with touch screen*.

Blue*1/Amber/Red/
Green

Header Clock Display

Selects whether the clock display comes on or not.

On*1/Off

Factory data reset
Default

Selectable Settings

Changes the clock display type.
●

Clock Adjustment
System
Settings

Description

Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 308

Cancels /Resets all customized items in the
System Settings group as default.

Yes/No
Yes/No

*1:Default Setting

Home

288

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Description

Selectable Settings

TPMS Calibration

Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS.

Cancel*1/Calibrate

Driver
Assist
System
Setup *

Forward Collision Warning
Distance *

Changes at which distance FCW alerts, or turns
FCW on and off.

Long/Normal*1/
Short/Off

Adjust Outside Temp.
Display

Adjust the temperature reading by a few
degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A
and average fuel economy A.

With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B
and average fuel economy B.

With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turn the ambient meter feature on and off.

On*1/Off

Keyless Start Guidance
Screens

Displays the push button start guidance when
conditions are met to change power mode.

On*1/Off

Memory Position Link

Changes the driver’s seat position to a stored
setting.

On*1/Off

Meter
Setup

Driving
Position
Setup*

TOC
Features

Vehicle
Settings

Customizable Features

Index
*1:Default Setting

Home
* Not available on all models

Continued

289

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Keyless
Access
Setup *

TOC
Features

Vehicle
Settings

Lighting
Setup

Description

Selectable Settings

Door Unlock Mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.

Driver Door Only*1/
All Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash

Causes some exterior lights to blink when you
unlock/lock the doors.

On*1/Off

Keyless Access Beep

Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab
either front door handle.

On*1/Off

Interior Light Dimming
Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.

60seconds/
30seconds*1/
15seconds

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver's door.

60seconds/
30seconds/
15seconds*1/
0seconds

Auto Light Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come
on.

Max/High/Mid*1/
Low/Min

*1:Default Setting

Index
Home

290

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

With Vehicle Speed*1/
Shift from P*2/Off

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors unlock
automatically.

All Doors When
Driver’s Door Opens*1/
All Doors When
Shifted to Park*2/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off

Key And Remote Unlock
Mode

Sets up either the driver's door or both doors to
unlock on the first push of the remote.

Driver Door /All
Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

On*1/Off

Security Relock Timer

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
and the security system to set after you unlock
the vehicle without opening either door.

90seconds/
60seconds/
30seconds*1

Maintenance
Info.

Maintenance Reset

Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service.

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Vehicle Settings group as default.

*1

TOC
Features

Vehicle
Settings

Selectable Settings

Changes the setting for the automatic locking
feature.

Auto Door Lock

Door
Setup

Description

—

Yes/No

Index

*1:Default Setting
*2:Automatic transmission/CVT models

Home
Continued

291

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Sound

Description

Selectable Settings

Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 159

P. 186

-6 ~ C*1 ~ +6 (Bass,
Treble, Fader, Balance
and SUBW*), Off/Low/
Mid*1/High (SVC)

Models with one display

Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources
comes on or not when the AUDIO button is pressed.
Source Select Popup

TOC

Models with two displays

On/Off*1

Features

Selects whether the list of selectable audio
sources comes on or not when Audio is selected
on the Function Change screen.
Audio
Settings

iPod®, USB, Pandora® or AhaTM mode

Cover Art
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM mode

Connect Bluetooth Audio Device
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM mode

Bluetooth Device List
iPod®, Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM
mode

Turns on and off the cover art display.

On*1/Off

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.

—

Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device paired
to HFL.

—

Selects the connection to have priority.

Bluetooth/USB*1

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
Settings group as default.

Yes/No

USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority *

Index
Home

292

Default
*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Info
Settings

Customizable Features
Clock/
Wallpaper
type

Description

Selectable Settings

Clock Type
Wallpaper
See System Settings on P. 287 to P. 288

Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info
Settings group as default.

TOC

Yes/No

Features

Default

Index
Home
Continued

293

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Connect Phone

Description

Selectable Settings

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 321

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone, or creates a security PIN.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 321

Edit Speed Dial

TOC
Features

Phone
Settings

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

Auto Transfer

Sets calls to automatically transfer from your
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

On*1/Off

Auto Answer

Sets whether to automatically answer an
incoming call after about four seconds.

On/Off*1

Ring Tone

Selects the ring tone.

Fixed/Mobile
Phone*1/Off

Automatic Phone Sync

Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

On*1/Off

Use Contact Photo*2

Displays a caller’s picture on an incoming call
screen.

On*1/Off

Phone

Index
Home

294

*1:Default Setting
*2:Models with two displays

—

2 Speed Dial P. 332

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Text/
Message*2,
Text/
Email*3

Default

Description

Selectable Settings

Enable Text Message*2,
Enable Text/Email*3

Turns the text message/E-mail function on and
off.

Select Account *

Selects a mail or text message account.

New Text Message Alert*2,
New Text/Email Alert*3

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text message/Email.

Message Auto Reading

Sets the system to automatically read an
incoming text message/E-mail.
● On- A text message/E-mail is always read
aloud.
● Off- A text message/E-mail is not read aloud.
● Auto- A text message/E-mail is read aloud only
when driving.

On/Off/Auto*1

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone
Settings group as default.

Yes/No

On*1/Off
—
On/Off*1

TOC
Features

Phone
Settings

Customizable Features

*1:Default Setting
*2:Models with one display
*3:Models with two displays

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

Continued

295

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Show with Turn Signal

Select whether the LaneWatch display comes on
when you move the turn signal lever to the
passenger side.

On*1/Off

Reference Lines

Selects whether the reference lines come on on
the LaneWatch monitor.

On*1/Off

Brightness
LaneWatch *

TOC

Contrast

Features

Display

Black Level

Adjusts the LaneWatch display settings.

—

Color
Camera
Settings

Tint

Rear
Camera

Index
Home

296

Default

Default*2

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default.

Yes/No

Fixed Guideline

Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on or
not on the rear camera monitor.

On*1/Off

Dynamic Guideline

Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
or not on the rear camera monitor.

On*1/Off

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear
Camera group as default.

Yes/No

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Camera Settings group as default.

Yes/No

*1:Default Setting
*2:Models with two displays
* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ List of customizable options
Models with navigation system

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Display

Sound/
Beep

Bluetooth

Selectable Settings

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen.

—

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/information
screen.

—

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen.

—

Volume

Changes the volume of the audio speakers.

—

Interface Dial Feedback *

Sets if and when the system reads aloud a
selection made using the Interface Dial.

On*1/Off/Auto

Message Auto Reading

Selects whether the system automatically read
out message, does not read, or read out only
when driving.

On*1/Off/Auto

Verbal Reminder *

Turns the verbal reminders on and off.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth

Turns the Bluetooth® on and off.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a security PIN.

TOC
Features

System
Settings

Description

—

2 Phone Setup P. 356

Edit Pairing Code

Changes a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 358

Random*1/Fixed

Home

*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models

Index

Continued

297

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Voice
Recog.

TOC
Features

System
Settings

Description

Volume

Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

Voice Prompt

Turns the voice prompt on and off.

Song by Voice

Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off.
2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 251

Song by Phonetic
Modification

Modifies a voice command for music stored in
the HDD or an iPod®.

Phonebook Phonetic
Modification

Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.

Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type

Clock Adjustment

Index
Home

298

On*1/Off
On*1/Off

—

—

2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 371

Changes the clock display type.

●
●

Changes the wallpaper type.
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 215

Clock

—

2 Phonetic Modification P. 253

●

Wallpaper

Selectable Settings

Analogue/Digital*1/
Small Digital/Off
Blank/Galaxy*1/
Metallic/Time Zone

Adjust Clock.

—

2 Setting the Clock P. 84

Clock Format

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.

12H*1/24H

Auto Time Zone *

Sets the navigation system to automatically
adjust the clock when driving through different
time zones.

On*1/Off

*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust
the clock (“spring ahead” or “fall back” by one
hour) when a daylight saving time change occurs.

Clock Reset

Resets the settings of all items in the Clock group.

Units *

Changes the distance unit on the navigation map
screen.

miles*1/km

Language

Changes the display language.

English*1/French/
Spanish

Voice Command Tips

Alerts you when manual control of the system is
disabled to prevent distraction while driving. Only
voice commands are available.

On*1/Off

Background Color

Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen and the audio with touch screen.

Blue*1/Amber/Red/
Green

Header Clock Display

Selects whether the clock display comes on or not.

On*1/Off

System Device Information

Displays the system/Device information.

Factory data reset

Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 309

Cancels /Resets all customized items in the
System Settings group as default.

On*1/Off
—

—
—
Default/OK

Index

*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models

TOC
Features

Other

Default

Selectable Settings

Auto Daylight *
Clock

System
Settings

Description

Home
Continued

299

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

TPMS Calibration

Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS.

Cancel*1/Calibrate

Driver
Assist
System
Setup *

Forward Collision Warning
Distance

Changes at which distance FCW alerts, or turns
FCW on and off.

Long/Normal*1/
Short/Off

Adjust Outside Temp.
Display

Adjust the temperature reading by a few
degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A *, and
elapsed time A *.

With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B *, and
elapsed time B *.

With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

On*1/Off

Keyless Start Guidance
Screens

Displays the push button start guidance when
conditions are met to change power mode.

On*1/Off

TOC
Features

Vehicle
Settings
Meter
Setup

*1:Default Setting

Index
Home

300

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Driving
Position
Setup*

Keyless
Access
Setup

Lighting
Setup

Selectable Settings

Memory Position Link

Changes the driver’s seat position to a stored
setting.

On*1/Off

Door Unlock Mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.

Drivers Door Only*1/
All Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash

Causes some exterior lights to blink when you
unlock/lock the doors.

On*1/Off

Keyless Access Beep

Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/
lock the doors.

On /Off

Interior Light Dimming
Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.

60seconds/
30seconds*1/
15seconds

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver's door.

60seconds/
30seconds/
15seconds*1/
0seconds

Auto Light Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come
on.

Max/High/Mid*1/
Low/Min

TOC
Features

Vehicle
Settings

Description

*1

*1:Default Setting

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

Continued

301

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Features

Door
Setup
Vehicle
Settings

Maintenance
Info.
Default

Index
*1:Default Setting

Home

302

Selectable Settings

Changes the setting for the automatic locking
feature.

With Vehicle Speed*1/
Shift from P/Off

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors unlock
automatically.

All Doors When
Driver’s Door Opens*1/
All Doors When
Shifted to Park/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off

Key And Remote Unlock
Mode

Sets up either the driver's door or both doors to
unlock on the first push of the remote.

Driver Door*1/All
Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

On*1/Off

Security Relock Timer

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
and the security system to set after you unlock
the vehicle without opening either door.

90seconds/
60seconds/
30seconds*1

Maintenance Reset

Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service.

Auto Door Lock

TOC

Description

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Vehicle Settings group as default.

—

Default/OK

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Show with Turn Signal

Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on
when you move the turn signal lever to the
passenger side.

On*1/Off

Reference Lines

Selects whether the reference lines come on on
the LaneWatch monitor.

On*1/Off

Next Maneuver Pop up

Selects whether a turn direction screen of the
navigation system interrupts on the LaneWatch
display.

On*1/Off

LaneWatch

TOC
Features

Brightness
Contrast

Camera
Settings

Display

Black Level

Adjusts the LaneWatch display settings.

—

Color
Tint

Rear
Camera

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default.

Default/OK

Fixed Guideline

Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on or
not on the rear camera monitor.

On*1/Off

Dynamic Guideline

Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
or not on the rear camera monitor.

On*1/Off

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear
Camera group as default.

Default/OK

Index
Home

*1:Default Setting

Continued

303

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Sound

Source Select Popup
AM/FM mode

TOC

HD Radio Mode

Features

Audio
Settings

CD (MP3/WMA/AAC), iPod®, USB, Pandora®
or AhaTM mode

Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM mode

Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM mode

Bluetooth Device List
CD mode

Recording from CD
CD mode

Recording Quality
*1:Default Setting

Home

304

Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 217

Selectable Settings
-6 ~ C*1 ~ +6 (Bass,
Treble, Fader, Balance
and SUBW), Off/Low/
Mid*1/High (SVC)

Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources
comes on or not when the AUDIO button is pressed.

On/Off*1

Selects whether the audio system automatically
switches to the digital radio waves or receives the
analogue waves only.

Auto*1/Analogue

Turns on and off the cover art display.

On*1/Off

Cover Art
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device

Index

Description

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.

—

Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device paired
to HFL.

—

Selects whether the songs on music CDs are
automatically recorded to the HDD or not.

Auto*1/Manual

Selects the quality of the music files recorded to
the HDD.

Standard*1/High

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features
HDD mode

Displays the HDD capacity.

HDD Info
CD or HDD mode

Gracenote Album DB Info Update
CD or HDD mode

Audio
Settings

Description

Update Gracenote Album Info

Selectable Settings
—

Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®
Media Database).

Update from USB*1/
Update from CD

Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®
Media Database).

Update by USB*1/
Update by CD

TOC

HDD mode

Pandora® or AhaTM mode

USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority *
Default

Connect phone

2 Deleting all HDD Data P. 310

—

Selects the connection to have priority.

USB*1/Bluetooth

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
Settings group as default.

Default/OK

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.

Features

Delete all HDD Data

—

2 Phone Setup P. 356

Phone
Settings

Phone

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone, or creates a security PIN.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 356

Edit Speed Dial

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2 Phone Setup P. 356

Index

—

Home

*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models

Continued

305

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Phone

TOC
Features

*1:Default Setting

Index
Home

306

Selectable Settings

Auto Transfer

Sets calls to automatically transfer from your
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.

On*1/Off

Auto Answer

Sets whether to automatically answer an
incoming call after about four seconds.

On/Off*1

Ring Tone

Selects the ring tone.

Fixed/Mobile
Phone*1/Off

Automatic Phone Sync

Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

On*1/Off

Use Contact Photo

Displays a caller’s picture on an incoming call
screen.

On*1/Off

Enable Text/Email

Turns the text message/E-mail function on and
off.

On*1/Off

Select Account

Selects a mail or text message account.

New Text/Email Alert

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text message/Email.

Phone
Settings

Text/
Email

Description

—
On/Off*1

uuCustomized Featuresu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Clock/
Wallpaper
type

Description

Selectable Settings

Clock
Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment
Clock

See System Settings on P. 297 to P. 299.

Clock Format
Auto Time Zone

*

TOC
Features

Auto Daylight *

Info
Settings

Clock Reset

Other

Default

INFO Screen Preference

Selects the top menu when the INFO button is
pressed.
● Info Top- A brief menu pops up.
● Info Menu- A full menu pops up.
● Off- A menu does not pop up.

Info Top/Info
Menu*1/Off

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info
Settings group as default.

Default/OK

*1:Default Setting

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

307

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Models without navigation system

Defaulting All the Settings

1Defaulting All the Settings

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.

Models with one display

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
Models with two displays

1. Press and hold the DISP button.
All models

TOC
Features

2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Other,
then Factory data reset.
u The confirmation message will appear.
3. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
reset the settings.

to

4. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
again to reset the settings.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Press
to select OK.

Index
Home

308

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

2013 Accord Coupe

Models with navigation system

Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Factory data reset,
then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.

When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
The following settings will be reset:
• Routing & Guidance: Rerouting, Unverified Area
Routing, Traffic Rerouting, Edit Waypoint Search
Area, Guidance Mode, Street Name Guidance
• Route Preference

TOC
Features

5. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
again to reset the settings.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Press
to select OK.

QRG
1Defaulting All the Settings

Index
Home

309

uuCustomized FeaturesuDeleting all HDD Data

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Models with navigation system

Deleting all HDD Data
Reset all the menu and customized settings, and delete all music data on the HDD.
1. Turn on the audio system and select the
HDD mode.
2. Press the SETTINGS button.
3. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .

TOC

4. Rotate
to select Delete all HDD Data,
then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.

Features

5. Rotate

Index
Home

310

to select Yes, then press

.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three
remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems.

■ Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that comes with your garage door opener to test that
the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety
information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the
way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.

HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls., Inc.
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage
door opener, confirm that the opener has an external
entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic
eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it
does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.

TOC
Features

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s
path.

1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *

Training HomeLink
Red Indicator

If you have not trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase any
previously learned codes. To do this:
• Press and hold the two outside buttons for
about 20 seconds, until the red indicator
blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to
step 1.
• If you are training the second or third
button, go directly to step 1.

Index
Home

* Not available on all models

Continued

311

uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Training a Button

1Training HomeLink

1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the
HomeLink button you want to program.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on
the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED)
blink after 10 secs?

NO

YES

Retraining a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed button for a
new device, you do not have to erase all button
memory. You can replace the existing memory code
using this procedure:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.

NO
Standard transmitter

TOC
Features

3. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink
button for about a sec.
Does the device (garage
door opener) work?

YES

YES

a. Press and hold the remote and the HomeLink
button at the same time. Then, while
continuing to hold the HomeLink button,
press and release the button on the remote
every 2 secs.
Does the LED blink within 20 secs?

NO
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button again.

Training
Complete

Index
Home

312

HomeLink LED
is on.

5. Press and hold the HomeLink
button again.
The remote-controlled device
should operate.
Training Complete

HomeLink indicator blinks for 2 secs,
then remains on.
a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the
“learn” button on the remote-controlled
device (e.g. garage door opener).

b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.

Indicator remains on
for about 25 secs.

Rolling code transmitter

Indicator blinks rapidly for
2 secs, then remains on for
about 23 secs.

2. Continue to hold the HomeLink button and
follow steps 1 - 3 under “Training a Button.”
Erasing Codes
To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside
buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink
(about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes
before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the device’s
instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call
HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Models without navigation system

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
(888) 528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
(888) 528 -7876.

Models with one display

To use HFL, the Bluetooth On/Off setting must be
On.
2 Customized Features P. 273

Volume up

Pick-up
Button
Volume down
Hang-up/Back Button
Talk Button

PHONE
Button
Selector
Knob

(Pick-up) button: Press to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook
name, or a number.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate
to select an item on the screen, then press .

Voice control tips
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press and release the
button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag, a
phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.

TOC
Features

Microphone

Index
Home

Continued

313

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Models with two displays

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Volume up

Pick-up
Button

Microphone
Volume down
Hang-up/Back Button

TOC

HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.

DISP
Button
Selector
Knob

Talk Button

Features

(Pick-up) button: Press to display the phone menu on half of the screen, or to
answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook
name, or a number.
Selector knob: Rotate

to select an item on the screen, then press

.

To go to the Phone screen:
1. Press the DISP button to switch the display to the Function Change screen.
2. Rotate

Index
Home

314

to select Phone, then press

.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is
under license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ HFL Status Display

1HFL Status Display

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Bluetooth Indicator

Battery Level
Status

Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.

Roam Status

HFL Mode

The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 273

Signal Strength

Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number

TOC
Features

■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until
the vehicle is stopped.

Disabled Options

Only previously stored speed dial entries with
voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers
can be called using voice commands while the
vehicle is in motion.

Index

2 Speed Dial P. 332

Home

315

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1 to use HFL.

1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.

■ Phone Settings screen
Models with one display

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
Models with two displays

1. Press and hold the DISP button.

Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.

All models

2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .

TOC
Features

Connect
Phone*2

Add Bluetooth Device
(Existing entry list)
Disconnect

Bluetooth
Device List

(Existing
entry list)*2

Add
Bluetooth
Device

Index
Home

316

Pair a phone to the system.
Connect a phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Edit PIN
Replace This
Device

Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Replace a previously paired phone with a
new phone.

Delete This
Device

Delete a previously paired phone.

Pair a phone to the system.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Manual Input Enter a phone number to store as a

New Entry

speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call
history to store as a speed dial number.
Import from Select a phone number from the
Phonebook phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Import from
Call History

Edit
Phone

Edit Speed
Dial*1

●

Delete

Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone

Change a number.
Create or delete a voice tag.

Delete a previously stored speed dial
number.

Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
vehicle.
Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four
seconds.
Select the ring tone.

TOC
Features

Delete All

Edit a previously stored speed dial number.
●

(Existing
entry list)

Automatic Phone Sync*1 Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to
Use Contact Photo*2

HFL.
Display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.

Index
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
*2: Models with two displays

Home
Continued

317

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Text Message
Text/Email*1, *3

*1, *2

Enable Text Message*2
Enable Text/Email*3
Select Account *
New Text Message Alert*2
New Text/Email Alert*3
Message Auto Reading

TOC

Default

Turn the text message/E-mail function on and off.
Select a mail or text message account.
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL
receives a new text message/E-mail.
Sets the system to automatically read an incoming text
message/E-mail.

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.

Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Index

*2: Models with one display
*3: Models with two displays

Home

318

* Not available on all models

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Phone screen
Models with one display

1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
Models with two displays

1. Press the DISP button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
Dial*1
Redial*1

Enter a phone number to dial.
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
All
Dialed
Received
Missed

Speed Dial*1

Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Display the last 20 missed calls.

New Entry

Manual Input
Import from
Call History
Import from
Phonebook

(Existing entry list)
More Speed Dials

TOC
Features

Call
History*1

.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a
speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a
speed dial number.

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.

Index
Home

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Continued

319

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Phonebook*1

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Text Message*1, *2
Text/Email*1, *3

Select Account *

Select a mail or text message account.

Read/Stop

Select a message
and press .

TOC
Features

Message is read
aloud.

Previous Message
Next Message
Reply
Call

Index
Home

320

System reads received message aloud, or
stop message from being read.
See the previous message.
See the next message.
Reply to a received message using one of
six fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
*2: Models with one display
*3: Models with two displays
* Not available on all models

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 319

2. Rotate

to select Yes, then press

.

3. Make sure your phone is search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.

5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
Continued

Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

TOC
Features

4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.

When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone
Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call
history and phonebook automatically imported to
HFL.
2 Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting P. 331

Index
Home

321

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
already been paired to the system)
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate
to select Connect Phone, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Add
Bluetooth Device.

TOC
Features

3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.

Index

5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.

Home

6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

322

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe

■ To change the pairing code setting
Models with one display

The pairing code may be six or four digits depending
on your phone.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
Models with two displays

The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.

1. Press and hold the DISP button.
All models

Edit Pairing Code

QRG
1To change the pairing code setting

2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
.
Bluetooth, then Edit Pairing Code

For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.

TOC
Features

3. Rotate
to select Fixed or Random,
then press .

To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.

Index
Home
Continued

323

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To replace an already-paired phone
with a new phone
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select a paired phone you
want to replace, then press .

TOC

4. Rotate
to select Replace This Device,
then press .

Features

5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches
a new phone.
u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

Index
Home

324

1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial
entries, call history, and security PIN information from
the previously paired phone.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Delete This Device,
then press .

6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if it is successful.

TOC
Features

5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .

Index
Home
Continued

325

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To Set Up a Text Message/Email Options
■ To turn on or off the text/E-mail
function
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 316
Models with one display

TOC
Features

2. Rotate
to select Text Message, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text Message.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
Models with two displays

2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text/Email.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
All models

3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then
press .

Index
Home

326

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe

■ To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice
Models with one display

1. On the Text Message screen, rotate
to
select New Text Message Alert, then
press .

QRG
1To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.

Models with two displays

1. On the Text/Email screen, rotate
to
select New Text/Email Alert, then
press .
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

TOC
Features

All models

2. Rotate
to select On or Off, then
press .

■ To set up the auto reading option
1. On the Text Message or the Text/Email
screen, rotate
to select Message Auto
Reading, then press .
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

1To set up the auto reading option
On: A text message/Email is always read aloud.
Off: A text message/Email is not read aloud.
Auto: A text message/Email is read aloud only when
driving.

2. Rotate
to select On, Off or Auto then
press .

Index
Home
Continued

327

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To Create a Security PIN

1To Create a Security PIN
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.

You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
4. Rotate

TOC

to select Edit PIN, then press

.

Features

5. Enter a new four-digit number.
Audio/information screen

u Audio/information screen
Rotate
to select, then press .
Press
to delete. Press OK to enter the
security PIN.
u Audio with touch screen *
You can also enter a number using the
icons.

Audio with touch screen *

6. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in
step 4.

Index
Home

328

* Not available on all models

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer.
3. Rotate

to select On, then press

.

.

TOC
Features

■ Auto Answer
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Answer.
3. Rotate

to select On, then press

.

.

Index
Home
Continued

329

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Ring Tone

1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the
connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.
Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.

You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
u Repeat the procedure to select Ring
Tone.

TOC
Features

Index
Home

330

.

3. Rotate
to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

■ When Automatic Phone Sync is
set to On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to HFL.

When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Other

■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

Work

Message

setting
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

Pager

Voice

2 Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
u Repeat the procedure to select
Automatic Phone Sync.

.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.

TOC
Features

Pref

The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.

3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then
press .

Index
Home
Continued

331

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Speed Dial

1Speed Dial

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Go to the Phone screen.
Mr.AAA

111AAA####

Mr.BBB

222BBB####

Mr.CCC

333CCC####

Mr.DDD

444DDD####

Mr.EEE

555EEE####

2 Phone screen P. 354
Models with one display

Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
2. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Entry.

TOC
Features

Select a method to store

3. Rotate
to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.

Index

4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate
to select Yes or No,
then press .

Home

5. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.

332

When a voice tag is stored, press the
button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and
the voice tag name.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed

1Speed Dial

dial number
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.

Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

2 Phone Settings screen P. 316

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
select Edit, then press .

.

to

TOC
Features

4. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then
press .
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Record, then press .
5. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

Index
Home
Continued

333

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To delete a voice tag
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 316

TOC
Features

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then
press .
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Clear, then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .

■ To delete a speed dial
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 316

Index
Home

334

2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Delete, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Making a Call

1Making a Call

You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the
button and say “Call” and the voice tag
name, “Call by name” and the phonebook name, or
the phone number.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.

TOC
Features

Index
Home
Continued

335

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To make a call using the imported

1To make a call using the imported phonebook

phonebook
1. Go to the Phone screen.

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 315
2 Speed Dial P. 332

2 Phone screen P. 319
Models with one display

Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.

Models with two displays

You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch
screen for an alphabetical search.

2. Rotate
to select Phonebook, then
press .

TOC
Features

3. Rotate
to select a name, then press
u You can also search by letter. Rotate
to select Alphabet Search, then
press .

.

Models with two displays

u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering letters.
4. Rotate
to select a number, then
press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

Index
Home

336

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To make a call using a phone number

1To make a call using a phone number

1. Go to the Phone screen.

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 315
2 Speed Dial P. 332

2 Phone screen P. 319
Models with one display

Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
2. Rotate

to select Dial, then press

.

Models with two displays

You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch
screen to input numbers.
Select numbers, then
to start dialing.

3. Rotate
to select a number, then
press .
.

TOC
Features

4. Rotate
to select
, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using redial
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 319
Models with one display

Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
2. Rotate
to select Redial, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.

.

1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the
button to redial the last
number dialed in your phone’s history.

Index
Home
Continued

337

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To make a call using the call history
Audio/information screen

Call history is stored by All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 319
Models with one display

Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.

TOC
Features

2. Rotate
to select Call History, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select All, Dialed, Received,
or Missed, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a number, then
press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

Index
Home

338

1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Audio with touch screen *

You can dial to the last six numbers in the call
history.
1. Select
.
2. Select Call History.
3. Select 1-6.
u Dialing starts automatically.

TOC
Features

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

Continued

339

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To make a call using a speed dial entry

1To make a call using a speed dial entry

Audio/information screen

Select More Speed Dials to view another paired
phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call from that
list using the currently connected phone.

1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 319

When a voice tag is stored, press the
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 332

Models with one display

Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.

2. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then
press .

TOC
Features

3. Rotate
to select a number, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.
Audio with touch screen *

You can dial to the first six numbers in the
speed dial entries ( - ).
1. Select
.

button to

.
Models with one display

To call stored speed dial entries 1-6, press the
corresponding preset buttons from the Phone
screen.

2. Select Speed Dial.
3. Select 1-6.
u Dialing starts automatically.

Index
Home

340

* Not available on all models

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming Call screen appears.
Press the

button to answer the call.

Press the

button to decline or end the call.

Call Waiting
Press the
button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the

button again to return to the current call.

Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it.
Press the
button if you want to hang up the
current call.
Models with two displays

TOC
Features

You can select the icons on the audio with touch
screen instead of the
and
buttons.

Index
Home
Continued

341

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Options During a Call

1Options During a Call

The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.

Models with two displays

Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
Mute Icon

TOC

Models with one display

Pres the MENU button to display the options.
Models with two displays

Features

The available options are shown on the lower
half of the screen.
All models

Rotate
to select the option, then press .
uThe mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

Index
Home

342

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.

You can select the icons on the audio with touch
screen.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail

HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently
received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud
and replied to using a fixed common phrase.

The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text messages and E-mails.

Models with two displays

HFL can also display E-mails.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message or E-mail.

3. To discontinue the message read-out, press
press .

When you receive a text message or E-mail for the
first time after the phone is paired to HFL, you are
asked to turn the New Text Message Alert or the
New Text/Email Alert setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice
P. 327

TOC
Features

2. Rotate
to select Read to listen to the
message, then press .
u The text message or E-mail is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading
out the message.

State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message/E-mail feature. Only use the text message/
E-mail feature when conditions allow you to do so
safely.

Index
Home
Continued

343

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Models with two displays

1Selecting a Mail Account

■ Selecting a Mail Account
If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 316

TOC

You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.
Rotate
to select Select Account on the top of the
list, then press .
Message List

Features

2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Select
Account.
3. Rotate
to select Text message or an Email account you want, then press .

You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.

Index
Home

344

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Displaying Messages
Message List

1Displaying Messages

■ Displaying text messages

The

1. Go to the Phone screen.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.

2 Phone screen P. 319
Models with one display

Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
Models with one display

Models with two displays

2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then
press .
u Select account if necessary.

To see the previous or next message, press
on the
text message screen. From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Previous Message or Next Message,
then press .

TOC
Features

Text Message

2. Rotate
to select Text Message, then
press .

icon appears next to an unread message.

All models

3. Rotate
to select a message, then
press .
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.

Index
Home
Continued

345

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Folder List

■ Displaying E-mails

1Displaying E-mails

Models with two displays

Received text messages and E-mails may appear in
the message list screen at the same time. In this case,
text messages are titled No Subject.

1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 319

2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then press
press .
u Select account if necessary.
3. Rotate

TOC

Message List

Features
E-mail

Index
Home

346

to select a folder, then press

.

4. Rotate
to select a message, then press
press .
u The E-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message
aloud.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Using the Stop or Read option

1Using the Stop or Read option

1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 345

2. Press
to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.

This option changes to:
• Stop while the text message/E-mail is read out.
Select this option to discontinue the message read
out.
• Read when the system has finished reading out the
text message/E-mail, or after you selected Stop.
Select this option to hear the system read out the
selected message.

3. Rotate
to select Stop or Read, then
press .

TOC
Features

Index
Home
Continued

347

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Reply to a message

1Reply to a message

1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2. Press
to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate

You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

2 Displaying Messages P. 345

TOC

to select Reply, then press

.

Features

4. Rotate
to select the reply message, then
press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.

Index
Home

348

The available fixed reply messages are as follows:

• Talk to you later, I’m driving.
• I’m on my way.
• I’m running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying text messages P. 345

2. Press
to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate

to select Call, then press

.

TOC
Features

Index
Home

349

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Models with navigation system

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s navigation system, without handling your cell phone.

Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons

To use HFL, the Bluetooth setting must be On.
2 Customized Features P. 273

Volume up

TOC

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
(888) 528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
(888) 528 -7876.

Microphone
Voice control tips

Features

Pick-up
Button

• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
Volume down
Hang-up/Back Button
Talk Button

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press and release the
button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag, a
phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.

PHONE
Button
Interface
Dial

(Pick-up) button: Press to go to the Phone Call screen or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.

(Talk) button: Press to give HFL voice commands.

Index
Home

350

PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Interface dial: Rotate
to select an item on the screen, then press
, or to select secondary menu.

. Move

,

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ HFL Status Display

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Bluetooth Indicator

Battery Level
Status

Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.

Roam Status

HFL Mode

Signal Strength

Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is
under license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.

■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until
the vehicle is stopped.

Disabled Option

The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.

Features

1HFL Status Display

TOC

You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 273

Only previously stored speed dial entries with
voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers
can be called using voice commands while the
vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 368

Index
Home

351

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use HFL.

1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.

■ Phone Settings screen
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .

TOC

Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.

(Existing entry list) Connect a phone to the system.

Features

Phone

Connect
phone

Add Bluetooth
Device
Disconnect

Pair a phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Edit Device
Name

(Existing
entry list)
Bluetooth
Device List
Add Bluetooth
Device

Index
Home

352

Edit the user name of a paired phone.

Replace This
Device

Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Replace a previously paired phone with a
new phone.

Delete This
Device

Delete a previously paired phone.

Edit PIN

Pair a phone to the system.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Delete All

Delete all the previously stored speed dial numbers.
Manual Input Enter a phone number to store as a speed

dial number.
Edit Speed
Dial

New Entry

Import from Select a phone number from the call
Call History history to store as a speed dial number.
Import from Select a phone number from the
Phonebook phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Edit

(Existing
entry list)

●
●

Delete

Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync

Text/Email

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
vehicle.
Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four
seconds.
Select the ring tone.

Use Contact Photo

Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to
HFL.
Display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.

Default

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.

Enable Text/Email
*1

Change a number.
Create or delete a voice tag.

Select Account
New Text/Email Alert

TOC
Features

Auto Transfer

Edit a previously stored speed dial number.

Turn the text message/E-mail function on and off.
Select a mail or text message account.
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new
text message/E-mail.

Index
Home

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Continued

353

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Phone screen
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.

TOC

Dial*1

Features

Phonebook*1

Enter a phone number to dial.
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Manual Input
New Entry

Import from
Phonebook

Speed Dial*1

354

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history to store as a
speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a
speed dial number.

(Existing entry list)

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.

More Speed Dials

Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.

Index
Home

Import from
Call History

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Redial*1

Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
All

Call History*1

Dialed
Received
Missed

Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Display the last 20 missed calls.
(Read/Stop)

Select a message
and press .

Text/Email*1

See the previous message.

Next

See the next message.

Reply

Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.

Call

TOC
Features

Message is
read aloud.

Previous

System reads received message aloud, or stop message
from being read.

Make a call to the sender.

Select Account Select a mail or text message account.

Index
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Home
Continued

355

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Rotate

TOC
Features

Index
Home

356

to select Yes, then press

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:

.

3. Make sure your phone is search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, move
to select Phone Not Found? and
search for Bluetooth devices using your
phone. From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.

• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.

• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone
Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call
history and phonebook automatically imported to
HFL.
2 Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting P. 367

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe

■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has

QRG

already been paired to the system)
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Connect
Phone, then Add Bluetooth Device.

TOC
Features

3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, move
to select Phone Not Found? and
search for Bluetooth devices using your
phone. From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.

Index

6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

Home

Continued

357

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
.
Pairing Code
3. Rotate
to select Fixed or Random,
then press .

TOC
Features

Index
Home

358

1To change the pairing code setting
The pairing code may be six or four digits depending
on your phone.
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe

■ To replace an already-paired phone
with a new phone

QRG
1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial
entries, call history, and security PIN information from
the previously paired phone.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List.
3. Rotate
to select a paired phone you
want to replace, then press .

5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches
a new phone.
u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.

TOC
Features

4. Rotate
to select Replace This Device,
then press .

6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.

Index
Home
Continued

359

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To delete a paired phone
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List.
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .

TOC

4. Rotate
to select Delete This Device,
then press .

Features

5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if it is successful.

Index
Home

360

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To Set Up a Text Message/E-mail Options
■ To turn on or off the text/E-mail
function
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text/Email.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

TOC

■ To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice

1To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice

Features

3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then
press .

On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new text message.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Text/Email Alert.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.

Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.

3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then
press .

Index
Home
Continued

361

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To set up the auto reading option
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Message
Auto Reading.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Rotate
to select On, Off or Auto, then
press .

TOC
Features

Index
Home

362

1To set up the auto reading option
On: A text message/Email is always read aloud.
Off: A text message/Email is not read aloud.
Auto: A text message/Email is read aloud only when
driving.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To Create a Security PIN

1To Create a Security PIN
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.

You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List.
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .

Audio/information screen

to select Edit PIN, then press

TOC
.

5. Enter a new four-digit number.
u Audio/information screen
Rotate
to select, then press .
Move
to delete. Rotate
to select
OK to enter the security PIN.

Audio with touch screen

Features

4. Rotate

u Audio with touch screen
You can also enter a number using the
icons.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in
step 4.

Index
Home
Continued

363

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Editing User Name
Edit the user name of a paired phone as
follows:
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List.
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
edit, then press .

TOC
Features

Audio/information screen

4. Rotate
to select Edit Device Name,
then press .
5. Enter a new name of the phone.

Audio with touch screen

u Audio/information screen
Rotate
to select, then press .
Move
to delete. Rotate
or move
to select OK then press
to enter the
name.
u Audio with touch screen
You can also enter a name using the
icons.

Index
Home

364

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer.
3. Rotate

to select On, then press

.

TOC
Features

■ Auto Answer
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Answer.
3. Rotate

to select On, then press

.

Index
Home
Continued

365

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Ring Tone

1Ring Tone

You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Ring
Tone.

TOC
Features

Index
Home

366

3. Rotate
to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the
connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.
Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to HFL.

■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Other

Work

Message

Pager

Voice

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Automatic Phone Sync.

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.

TOC
Features

setting

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History

The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.

3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then
press .

Index
Home
Continued

367

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Speed Dial

1Speed Dial

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.

TOC

3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Entry.

Features

4. Rotate
to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
5. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate
to select Yes or No,
then press .

Index
Home

368

6. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.

When a voice tag is stored, press the
button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and
the voice tag name.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe

■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number

QRG
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.

Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.

2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.

It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
select Edit, then press .

to

TOC
Features

4. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then
press .
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Record, then press .
5. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

Index
Home
Continued

369

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

TOC

■ To delete a voice tag

Features

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then
press .
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Clear, then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .

■ To delete a speed dial

Index
Home

370

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Delete, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Phonebook Phonetic Modification

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that
it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.
■ To add a new voice tag

Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By
Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .

TOC
Features

4. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
add phonetic modification to, then
press .

Index
Home
Continued

371

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
5. Rotate
to select New Voice Tag, then
press .
6. Move
or
and rotate
to select a
contact name, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
7. Rotate

to select Modify, then press

.

8. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

TOC
Features

Index
Home

372

9. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select OK, then
press .

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To modify a voice tag

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .

You cannot modify or delete a contact name if it is
edited with a phone other than the phone connected
to HFL.

3. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
add phonetic modification to, then
press .

6. Rotate

to select Modify, then press

.

TOC
Features

5. Rotate
to select a contact name you
want to modify, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.

7. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
8. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select OK, then
press .

Index
Home
Continued

373

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To delete a modified voice tag
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
delete phonetic modification, then
press .

TOC
Features

5. Rotate
to select a contact name you
want to delete, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Rotate
7. Move
press

Index
Home

374

to select Delete, then press
and rotate
.

to select OK, then

.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe

■ To delete all modified voice tags

QRG

Connect phone

1. Press the SETTINGS button.
Phone#1
Phone#2
Phone#3

2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .

Connect phone

4. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
delete phonetic modification, then
press .
u The contact name list appears.
to select Delete All,

6. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .

Features

5. Move and rotate
then press .

TOC

Index
Home
Continued

375

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Making a Call

1Making a Call

You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the
button and say “Call” and the voice tag
name, “Call by name” and the phonebook name, or
the phone number.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).

TOC
Features

Index
Home

376

Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe

■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook, then
press .
4. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Move to Search.
u You can use the keyboard on the touch
screen for an alphabetical search.

This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 351
2 Speed Dial P. 368
You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch
screen for an alphabetical search.

TOC
Features

5. Rotate
to select a number, then
press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

QRG
1To make a call using the imported phonebook

Index
Home
Continued

377

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To make a call using a phone number

1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 351
2 Speed Dial P. 368

1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate

to select Dial, then press

.

4. Rotate
to select a number, then
press .
5. Rotate
to select
, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.

You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch
screen to input numbers.
Select numbers, then
to start dialing.

.

TOC
Features

■ To make a call using redial
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Redial, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.

.

1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the
button to redial the last
number dialed in your phone’s history.

Index
Home

378

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe

■ To make a call using the call history
1. Press the PHONE button.

QRG
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)

2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Call History, then
press .
4. Move
or
to select All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
5. Rotate
to select a number, then
press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

TOC
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
Move to select More Speed Dials to view another
paired phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call
from that list using the currently connected phone.

1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then
press .
4. Rotate
to select a number, then
press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

When a voice tag is stored, press the
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 368

Features

■ To make a call using a speed dial entry

These icons next to the number indicate the
following:
: Dialed calls.
: Received calls.
: Missed calls.

button to

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name
or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.

Index
Home
Continued

379

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming call screen appears.

TOC
Features

Index
Home

380

Press the

button to answer the call.

Press the

button to decline or end the call.

Call Waiting
Press the
button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the
button again to return to the
current call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to
answer it.
Press the
button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the audio with touch
screen instead of the
and
buttons.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Options During a Call

1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.

The following options are available during a call.

You can select the icons on the audio with touch
screen.

Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
The available options are shown on the Phone
Mute Icon
screen.

TOC
Features

Rotate
to select the option, then press .
uThe mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

Index
Home
Continued

381

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
HFL can display newly received text messages and E-mails as well as 20 of the most
recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be
read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message or E-mail.

TOC
Features

Index
Home

382

2. Rotate
to select Read to listen to the
message, then press .
u The text message or E-mail is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading
out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out,
press .

1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text messages and E-mails.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message/E-mail feature. Only use the text message/
E-mail feature when conditions allow you to do so
safely.
When you receive a text message or E-mail for the
first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are
asked to turn the New Text/Email Alert setting to
On.
2 To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice
P. 361

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Selecting a Mail Account

1Selecting a Mail Account

If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.

You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.
Move to select Select Account, then press .

2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Select
Account.
3. Rotate
to select Text message or an
E-mail account you want, then press .

TOC
Features

You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.

Index
Home
Continued

383

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Displaying Messages
Message List

1Displaying Messages

■ Displaying text messages

The

1. Press the PHONE button.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.

2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then
press .
u Select account if necessary.

TOC
Features

Index
Home

384

Text Message

4. Rotate
to select a message, then
press .
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.

icon appears next to an unread message.

To see the previous or next message, move
on the text message screen.

or

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
Folder List

QRG

■ Displaying E-mails

1Displaying E-mails
Received text messages and E-mails may appear in
the message list screen at the same time. In this case,
text messages are titled No subject.

1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then
press .
4. Rotate

Message List

to select a folder, then press

.

TOC
Features

5. Rotate
to select a message, then
press .
u The E-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message
aloud.

E-mail

Index
Home
Continued

385

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Read or stop reading a message
1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 384

2. Press
to stop reading.
Press
again to start reading the message
from the beginning.

TOC

■ Reply to a message

1Reply to a message

Features

1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 384

2. Move and rotate
then press .

to select Reply,

3. Rotate
to select the reply message, then
press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.

Index
Home

386

The available fixed reply messages are as follows:

• Talk to you later, I’m driving.
• I’m on my way.
• I’m running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

2013 Accord Coupe

■ Making a call to a sender

QRG

1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.

John 0123456789####

2 Displaying text messages P. 384
Reply

Call

2. Move
press

and rotate
.

to select Call, then

TOC
Features

Index
Home

387

Compass *
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
When you set the power mode to ON, the compass self-calibrates, and the compass
display appears.

Compass Calibration
If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need
to manually calibrate the system.
1. Set the power mode to ON.

TOC
Features

2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold
for 5 seconds.
u The display switches to the Compass
Settings screen.
3. Rotate
to select Calibration, then
press .

1Compass *
Compass operation can be affected under the
following conditions:
• Driving near power lines or stations
• Crossing a bridge
• Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large
object that can cause a magnetic disturbance
• When accessories such as antennas and roof racks
are mounted by magnets
1Compass Calibration
Calibrate the compass in an open area.
While setting the compass, press the BACK button to
cancel the setting mode and return to the previous
screen.

4. When the display changes to Calibration
Start, press .
5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.
u The compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator
goes off.

Index
Home

388

* Not available on all models

uuCompass * uCompass Zone Selection

2013 Accord Coupe

Compass Zone Selection

QRG

1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold
for 5 seconds.
u The display switches to the Compass
Settings screen.
3. Rotate
to select Zone Adjust, then
press .
u The display shows the current zone
number.
4. Rotate
to select the zone number of
your area (See Zone Map), then press .

The zone selection is done to compensate the
variation between magnetic north and true north.
If the calibration starts while the audio system is in
use, the display returns to normal after the calibration
is completed.

TOC
Features

Zone Map

1Compass Zone Selection

1

15
14

2
3

13
12

4
11
5
6
7

Guam Island: Zone 8

8

9

10

Index

Puerto Rico: Zone 11

Home

389

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Index
Home

390

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.

Before Driving
Driving Preparation .......................... 392
Maximum Load Limit........................ 395
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation.......................... 397
Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 399
Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 400
When Driving
Starting the Engine .................. 401, 403
Precautions While Driving................. 407
Automatic Transmission/CVT............ 408
Shifting ............................ 409, 413, 417
ECON Button ................................... 420
* Not available on all models

Cruise Control ................................. 421
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) * .. 424
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) * ..... 428
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC
(Electronic Stability Control), System ...... 431
LaneWatchTM *.......................................... 433
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)... 435

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation ......... 437
Braking
Brake System ................................... 439
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 441

Brake Assist System ......................... 442
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 443
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 444
Rearview Camera ............................. 445
Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 446
How to Refuel ................................. 447
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy.................. 448
Accessories and Modifications ........ 449

Index
Home

391

Before Driving
QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.

■ Exterior Checks
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

392

• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 485

• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.

1Exterior Checks
NOTICE

When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert key if the water freezes in
the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal.
Also check under the hood for leftover flammable
materials after you or someone else has performed
maintenance on your vehicle.

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Interior Checks

1Interior Checks

• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 395

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the
aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.

• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.

• Securely close and lock both doors and the trunk.

TOC
Driving

• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 94

• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 125
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 128

• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 123
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 122

Index
Home
Continued

393

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 33

• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 66

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

394

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

2013 Accord Coupe

Maximum Load Limit

QRG
1Maximum Load Limit

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.

3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.

Label Example

Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories,
and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,4000 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

TOC
Driving

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue
load.
2 Specifications P. 530
P. 532
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 530
P. 532

Index
Home

Continued

395

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and
trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver's doorjamb.
Load Limits Example

TOC
Driving

Example1

Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)

Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)

Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)

Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)

Example2

Index
Home

396

Towing a Trailer
2013 Accord Coupe

Towing Preparation

QRG

■ Towing Load Limits

1Towing Load Limits

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.

■ Total trailer weight
Maximum allowable weight of the trailer,
cargo, and everything in or on it must not
exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing loads in
excess of this can seriously affect vehicle
handling and performance and can damage
the engine and drivetrain.
Total Load

■ Tongue load

Tongue Load
Tongue
Load

• Excessive tongue load reduces front tire
traction and steering control. Too little
tongue load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.
• To achieve a proper tongue load, start by
loading 60% of the load toward the front
of the trailer and 40% toward the rear.
Readjust the load as needed.

Check the loading of your vehicle and
trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated
weight of your cargo load to the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the
tongue load.
Break-in Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600
miles (1,000 km).

TOC
Driving

The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded
trailer on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight.

3 WARNING
Exceeding any load limit or improperly
loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a
crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.

Gross weight information
Never exceed the gross weight ratings.
2 Vehicle Specifications P. 530
P. 532

Index
Home
Continued

397

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Towing Equipment and Accessories
Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing,
and where you are towing.

■ Hitches
The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.

■ Safety chains
Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.

■ Trailer brakes
TOC
Driving

There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are
common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes,
be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to
your vehicle's hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a
potential hazard.

■ Additional towing equipment
Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a
trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special
mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.

■ Trailer light
Index
Home

398

Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and
local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the
requirements in the area where you plan to tow.

1Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and
maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/
territory, and local regulations.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other
items are recommended or required for your towing
situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type
and brand. If a connector is required, it should only
be installed by a qualified technician.

uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer

2013 Accord Coupe

Driving Safely with a Trailer

QRG

■ Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer

1Driving Safely with a Trailer

• Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.
• Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.

Parking
In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel
chocks at each of the trailer's tires.

2 Towing Load Limits P. 397

• Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.
• Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving.
• Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.
• Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.

■ Towing Speeds and Gears

TOC
Driving

• Drive slower than normal.
• Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Automatic transmission/CVT models

• Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.
•■ Turning

and Braking

• Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.
• Allow more time and distance for braking.
Do not brake or turn suddenly.

Index
Home
Continued

399

uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Driving in Hilly Terrain
• Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the
climate control system and reduce speed. Pull to the side of the road safely to cool
down the engine if necessary.
Automatic transmission models

• Shift to the (S position if the transmission shifts frequently.

Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 527

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

400

When Driving
2013 Accord Coupe

Models without smart entry system

QRG

Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).

Automatic transmission (CVT) models

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .

Clutch Pedal

Manual transmission models

2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.

Brake Pedal

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant
mixture should be charged to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.

TOC
Driving

Brake Pedal

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.

Index
Home

Continued

401

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e
without depressing the accelerator pedal.

■ Starting to Drive
Automatic transmission (CVT) models

TOC

1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the brake system indicator has gone off.

Driving

3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.

Manual transmission models

402

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is
used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 101

2 Parking Brake P. 439

Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

Home

Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 15
seconds.
• If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 10 seconds before trying again.
• If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 10 seconds before repeating step 3
while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine
starts.

2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing.

■ Hill start assist system

Index

1Starting the Engine

Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to (1 when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Automatic transmission (CVT) models

Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,
then release the brake pedal.

1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

2013 Accord Coupe

Models with smart entry system

QRG

Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).

Automatic transmission/CVT models

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .

Clutch Pedal

Manual transmission models

2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
Brake Pedal

If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant
mixture should be changed to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.

TOC
Driving

Brake Pedal

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.
If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s
fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 101

Index
Home

Continued

403

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
All models

3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.

1Starting the Engine
Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry
remote is weak.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 512
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is
subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds
before trying again.

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

404

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Automatic transmission/CVT models

1. Shift to (P .
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Manual transmission models

• If the shift lever is in (N , press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• If the shift lever is in any gear other than (N , depress the clutch pedal, then press
the ENGINE START/STOP button.

TOC

■ Starting to Drive

Driving

Automatic transmission/CVT models

1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the parking brake indicator has gone off.
2 Parking Brake P. 439

2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.

Index
Home
Continued

405

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.

1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.

Manual transmission models

Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to (1 when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Automatic transmission/CVT models

Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,
then release the brake pedal.

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

406

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

2013 Accord Coupe

Precautions While Driving
■ In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

■ Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

QRG
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE

Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q or
LOCK (0 *1 while driving, the engine will shut down
and all steering and brake power assist functions will
stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in (N , as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.

TOC
Driving

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.

Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Home

407

uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission/CVT

QRG

Automatic Transmission/CVT
■ Creeping
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

■ Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

408

2013 Accord Coupe

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

2013 Accord Coupe

Automatic transmission (CVT) models

QRG

Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

1Shifting
You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1
and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P .

■ Shift lever positions
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Used when idling

Release Button

When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.

TOC
Driving

Drive
Used:
● For normal driving
● When temporarily driving in the 7-speed
manual shift mode

The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.

Drive (S)
Used:
● For better acceleration
● To increase engine braking
● When going up or down hills
● When driving in the 7-speed manual
shift mode

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home

Continued

409

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Shift Lever Operation

1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE

Tachometer’s red zone
Shift Lever Position Indicator
M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode)
Indicator/Shift Indicator

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

410

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Depress the brake pedal and press the
shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.

Press the shift lever release button
and shift.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode

Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without removing
your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed
manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful
when engine braking is needed.

■ When the shift lever is in (D :
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the
number is displayed in the shift indicator.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant
speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off.
You can cancel this mode by pulling the (+ paddle shifter for a few seconds.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed
temporarily before making a turn.

The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the
speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down,
the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to
a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s
red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.

In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission
shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter
under the following conditions:
Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher speed position.
Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower speed position.
When the engine speed reaches near the
tachometer’s red zone, the transmission shifts up
automatically.
When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold
of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts
down automatically.

TOC
Driving

■ When the shift lever is in (S :

To improve fuel economy, the transmission may shift
up to a higher speed than the seventh under certain
circumstances. In this case, the number in the shift
indicator remains as 7.

Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces
may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back
to the normal D driving mode.

You can only pull away in 1st speed.
When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to
(D . When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift
indicator go off.
Continued

Index
Home

411

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
(- Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation

(+ Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)

Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed
change.
To change continuously, release the paddle shifter
before pulling it again for the next speed.
Recommended Shift Points
Use this table as a guideline to help increase fuel
efficiency and reduce emissions.
Shift Up
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
5 to 6

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

412

Downshifting when pulling
the (- paddle shifter
(Changes to lower speed
number)

Upshifting when pulling
the (+ paddle shifter
(Changes to higher speed
number)

Normal Acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
47 mph (76 km/h)
52 mph (84 km/h)

The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or
down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its
allowable shifting range.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

2013 Accord Coupe

Automatic transmission models

QRG

Shifting

1Shifting

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P .

■ Shift lever positions
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse
Used when reversing

When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures
(-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the
shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you
are in the correct gear before driving.

Neutral
Used when idling
Drive
Used for:
● Normal driving (gears change between
1st and 6th automatically)
● Temporally driving in the sequential
mode

TOC
Driving

Release Button

The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.

Drive (S)
● Automatically changing gears between
1st and 5th (5th gear is used only at
high speed)
● Used when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain
● Used for driving in the sequential mode

Index
Home
Continued

413

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Shift Lever Operation

1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE

Tachometer’s red zone
Shift Lever Position Indicator
M (Sequential Shift Mode)
Indicator/Gear Position Indicator

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

414

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Depress the brake pedal and press the
shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.

Press the shift lever release button
and shift.

It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Sequential Shift Mode
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 6th gears without removing your
hands from the steering wheel. The transmission will switch to the sequential shift
mode.

■ When the shift lever is in (D :
The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode momentarily, and the gear position
indicator will come on.
Once you start traveling at a constant speed, the sequential shift mode will
automatically switch off, and the gear position indicator will go off.
Hold the (+ paddle shifter for two seconds to return to normal drive.

TOC

■ When the shift lever is in (S :

Driving

The vehicle will go into the sequential shift mode, and the M (sequential shift mode)
indicator and gear position indicator will come on. At speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or
less, the vehicle automatically shift down into 1st gear.
If you do not operate the paddle shifters while in 1st gear, the transmission
automatically shift up to 2nd gear. If does not shift automatically from 2nd through
6th gears.
You can only pull away in 1st and 2nd gear.
When canceling the sequential shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to (D .
When the sequential shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and gear position
indicator go off.

Index
Home

Continued

415

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Second gear lock mode
If you pull the (+ paddle shifter while stopped or driving at 6 mph (10 km/h) or less,
the gear position will be locked in 2nd gear. This makes it easier to pull away on
slippery surfaces such as snow covered roads.
To cancel the 2nd gear lock mode, pull the (- paddle shifter, or move the shift lever
from (S to (D .

■ Sequential Shift Mode Operation
(- Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)

1Sequential Shift Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single gear
change.
(+ Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)

Recommended Shift Points
Use this table as a guideline to help increase fuel
efficiency and reduce emissions.

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

416

To change gear continuously, release the paddle
shifter before pulling it again for the next gear.

Shift Up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

Downshifting when pulling
the (- paddle shifter
(Changes to a lower gear)

Upshifting when pulling
the (+ paddle shifter
(Changes to a higher gear)

Normal Acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
47 mph (76 km/h)
53 mph (85 km/h)

The gear position indicator blinks when you cannot
shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed
is not in its allowable gear shifting range.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

2013 Accord Coupe

Manual transmission models

QRG

Shifting

1Shifting

■ Shift Lever Operation

NOTICE

Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then
slowly release the pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into (R , or
shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not
“grind.”

Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a
complete stop.
Shifting to (R before stopping can damage the
transmission.
NOTICE

Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not
go into the tachometer's red zone. Should this occur,
it can severely damage your engine.

TOC
Driving

There is a metallic part on the shift lever. If you leave
the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot
day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because
of heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the
outside temperature is low, the shift lever may feel
cold.

Index
Home
Continued

417

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
When you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your
clutch to wear out faster.

1Shifting
Recommended Shift Points
Driving in the highest gear that allows the engine to
run and accelerate smoothly helps to optimize fuel
economy and effective emissions control. The
following shift points are recommended:
4-cylinder models

Shift Up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

TOC

Normal Acceleration
17 mph (27 km/h)
29 mph (46 km/h)
37 mph (60 km/h)
43 mph (69 km/h)
49 mph (79 km/h)

6-cylinder models

Driving

Shift Up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

Normal Acceleration
17 mph (28 km/h)
27 mph (44 km/h)
36 mph (58 km/h)
41 mph (66 km/h)
44 mph (71 km/h)

If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you
are in, the engine speed will enter into the
tachometer's red zone. When this happens, you may
experience a slight jolt.

Index
Home

418

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Reverse Lockout
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally
shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain
speed.
If you cannot shift to (R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:
1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift
lever all the way to the left, and shift to (R .
2. If you still cannot shift into (R , apply the
parking brake, and turn the ignition switch
to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1.
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into (R .

Have the vehicle checked by a dealer if you
have to go through this procedure repeatedly.

TOC
Driving

4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start
the engine.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home

419

uuWhen DrivinguECON Button

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

ECON Button
The ECON button turns the ECON mode on
and off.
The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel
economy by adjusting the performance of the
engine, transmission, climate control system,
and cruise control.

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

420

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

2013 Accord Coupe

Cruise Control

QRG

Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.

■ Vehicle speed for cruise control:
Automatic transmission/CVT models

■ Shift positions for cruise control:

Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.

Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.

It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.

In (D or (S

How to use

CRUISE MAIN is on in the
instrument panel.
Cruise control is ready to use.

the steering wheel.

When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.
While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more
time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.

TOC
Driving

■ Press the CRUISE button on

3 WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.

When to use

Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~

1Cruise Control

Manual transmission models

When the engine speed slows down, try to
downshift.
You can maintain the set speed if you change gear
within fives seconds.

Index
Home
Continued

421

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed
–/SET Button

On

On

Press and release

On when cruise control begins

TOC

Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.

Driving

The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.

Index
Home

422

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.

You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button
on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
the accelerator and brake pedals.

To increase speed

To decrease speed

• Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

TOC
Driving

• If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you
release it. This speed is then set.
1To Cancel

■ To Cancel
CRUISE
Button
CANCEL
Button

To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the CRUISE button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or
more.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.

Index
Home

423

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) *
Alerts you when it detects the possibility of your vehicle colliding with the vehicle in
front of yours.
If the system determines a collision is possible, it gives both visual and audible alerts,
including a heads-up warning that flashes on the windshield.
uTake appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes,
etc.).

■ How the system works
The system may give warnings of potential collisions when your vehicle speed is
above 10 mph (15 km/h).
You can set Long, Normal or Short for when warnings start:
LONG

TOC

1Forward Collision Warning (FCW) *
Important Safety Reminder
FCW cannot detect all objects ahead and may not
detect a given object; accuracy of the system will vary
based on weather, speed and other factors. FCW
does not include a braking function. It is always your
responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid
collisions.
You can change the Forward Collision Warning
Distance setting or turn the system on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 273
The camera is shared with Lane Departure Warning
(LDW).
2 LDW Camera P. 429

NORMAL

Driving

SHORT

Your Vehicle

Vehicle Ahead

Index
Home

424

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
1Forward Collision Warning (FCW) *
Camera-based system
The camera is located
behind the rearview mirror.

Heads-up Warning Lights
Flash twice.

Beep

The beeper sounds and
the FCW indicator blinks
until a possible collision
is avoided.

Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the FCW camera's
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the FCW camera's field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera's field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the FCW
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.

The heads-up warning uses a lens located at the front
end of the dashboard.

Driving

1How the system works

TOC

Do not cover the lens or spill any liquid on it.

Lens

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

Continued

425

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Automatic shutoff
FCW may automatically shut itself off and the FCW indicator comes and stays on when:
• The temperature inside the system is high.
• The windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
Once the conditions that caused FCW to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g.,
cleaning), the system comes back on.

1Automatic shutoff
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut
off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front
of the vehicle away from the sun. Also, do not use a
reflective sun shade that can concentrate heat on the
camera.
If the CAMERA HOT message appears:

• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when
windows are fogged.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the FCW system.

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

426

uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ FCW Limitations
FCW may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle, and may
activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no
vehicle ahead under the following conditions.
Condition
●
●
●
●
●

●

●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●

●
●

TOC
Driving

●

The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
When either your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you accelerates rapidly.
The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, a small vehicle, or a unique vehicle such as a
tractor.
When you drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period that makes it difficult for the camera to properly detect a vehicle in front
of you.
When there are pedestrians or animals in front of your vehicle.
When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).
A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
When the temperature inside the system is high.
A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).
When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.
When streetlights are perceived as the taillight of a vehicle in front of yours.
When driving at night, the vehicle ahead of you is running with either taillight bulb burned
out.
When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
When your vehicle is towing a trailer.

Index
Home

427

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) *
Alerts you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally
crossing over left or right side lane markings.

■ How the System Works
If your vehicle is getting too close to detected
left or right side lane markings without a turn
signal activated, LDW will give audible and
visual alerts.
The beeper sounds and the LDW indicator
blinks, letting you know that you need to take
appropriate action.

1Lane Departure Warning (LDW) *
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LDW has limitations.
Over-reliance on LDW may result in a collision. It is
always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within
your driving lane.
LDW only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. LDW may not detect all
lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary
based on weather, speed and lane marker condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

428

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How the System Activates

1How the System Activates

The system begins to search for lane markings when all the following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is traveling between at 40-90 mph (64-145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not pressed.

■ LDW Camera
LDW Camera

The camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.

LDW Button
Indicator

Press the LDW button to turn the system on
and off.
uThe indicator in the button comes on
when the system is on.

1LDW Camera
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the LDW camera's
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the LDW camera's field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera's field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the LDW
camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.

TOC
Driving

■ LDW On and Off

LDW may automatically shut off and the LDW
indicator comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 74

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut off,
when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the
vehicle away from the sun. Also, do not use a reflective
sun shade that can concentrate heat on the camera.
If the CAMERA HOT message appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when
windows are fogged.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the LDW system.

Index
Home

* Not available on all models

Continued

429

uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ LDW Limitations
LDW may not activate or may not recognize lanes, and may activate even when
keeping in the middle of a lane under the following conditions.
Condition

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

430

●

When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).

●

A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.

●

An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).

●

When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.

●

When the temperature inside the system is high.

●

A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.

●

You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).

●

When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.

●

When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.

●

When your vehicle is towing a trailer.

●

When you drive on a wet road surface following another vehicle.
uThe camera may perceive the tire tracks in the water as lane lines.

●

When there is snow or wheel tracks on the side of the road.

●

When the road has many repaired area or an erased lane line.

●

When the vehicle is running over painted signs or crosswalk markings.

●

When you drive in a lane with specific lane markups (e.g., bots-dots).

uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System

VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic
Stability Control), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less
than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.
It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

■ VSA® Operation
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.

QRG
1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), System
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.

TOC
Driving

VSA® System
Indicator

2013 Accord Coupe

Index
Home
Continued

431

uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ VSA® On and Off
VSA® OFF Indicator

This button is on the driver side control panel.
To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and
hold it until you hear a beep.
VSA® will stop and the indicator will come on.
To turn it on again, press the
button until you hear a beep.

TOC

(VSA® OFF)

VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.

1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), System
Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking
and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA®
traction and stability enhancement.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the VSA® system is off, the traction control
system is also off. You should only attempt to free
your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to
free it when the VSA® is on.

Driving

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control
systems switched off.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on or
blinks, the VSA® system comes on automatically. In
this case, you cannot turn the system off by pressing
the

Index
Home

432

button.

You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *

2013 Accord Coupe

LaneWatchTM *

QRG

Is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas
displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the
passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas
and allows you to check for vehicle, in addition to your visual check and use of the
passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while
driving.
1 The system activates when you:

Move the turn signal
lever to the passenger
side.

Press the LaneWatch
button.

2

The passenger side view
display appears on the
audio/information screen.

3 WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while
driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.

Press the LaneWatch
button again.

TOC
Driving

Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has
limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in
a collision.

The system deactivates when you:
Pull the turn signal
lever back.

1LaneWatchTM *

The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,
lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),
ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.
The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique
lens makes objects on the screen slightly look
different from what they are.

Audio/Information Screen

LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift
lever is in (R .

Camera

Index
Home

* Not available on all models

Continued

433

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Customizing the LaneWatch Settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.
• Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal light lever.
• Reference Lines: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch
monitor.
• Next Maneuver Pop up *: Selects whether a turn direction screen of the
navigation system interrupts the LaneWatch display.

1LaneWatchTM *
For a proper LaneWatch use:
• The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera
lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,
moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of
debris.
• Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers
of any kind.
• Do not touch the camera lens.

• Display: Adjusts display settings.
2 Customized Features P. 273

1Reference Lines

■ Reference Lines
TOC
Driving

3

2
1

Three lines that appear on the screen can give
an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on
the screen are from your vehicle, respectively.
If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates
that it is close to your vehicle whereas an
object near line 3 farther away.

The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close
to your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually
confirm the safety of a lane change before changing
lanes.
The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and
3 on the screen vary depending on road condition
and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines
on the screen may seem to appear closer than the
actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more
heavily loaded.
Consult a dealer if:

• The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is

Index

severely impacted, resulting in changing the
camera angle.
• The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.

Home

434

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

2013 Accord Coupe

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

QRG

Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are
significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to
come.

■ TPMS Calibration

The system does not monitor the tires when driving
at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
• Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
• Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a
result of over inflation.

You must start TPMS calibration every time you:
• Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
• Rotate the tires.
• Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS:
• Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.

Make sure:
• The vehicle is at a complete stop.

TOC
Driving

The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 485

2 Checking Tires P. 485

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
with a delay or may not come on at all when:
• You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
• You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
• Snow chains are used.

Manual transmission models

• The shift lever is in (N .
Automatic transmission/CVT models

• The shift lever is in (P .
All models

• The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

1TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Continued

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
under the following conditions:
• A compact spare tire is used.
• There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,
such as when towing a trailer, than the condition at
calibration.
• Snow chains are used.

Index
Home

435

uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator

TPMS
Button

Press and hold the TPMS button until the low
tire pressure/TPMS indicator blinks twice,
indicating the calibration process has begun.
• If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does
not blink, confirm the above conditions
then press and hold the TPMS button again.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.

1TPMS Calibration

• TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is
installed.

• The calibration process requires approximately 30
minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between
30-60 mph (48-97 km/h).
• During this period, if the ignition is turned on and
the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you
may notice the low tire pressure indicator comes on
briefly. This is normal and indicates that the
calibration process is not yet complete.
You can calibrate the system using the audio/
information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 273

TOC
Driving

If the snow chains are installed, remove them before
calibrating the TPMS.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even
when the properly inflated specified regular tires are
installed, have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the
same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a
dealer for details.

Index
Home

436

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

2013 Accord Coupe

U.S. models

QRG

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated.

TOC
Driving

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop
and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Index
Home
Continued

437

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it
is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

TOC

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

Driving

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Index
Home

438

Braking
2013 Accord Coupe

Brake System

QRG

■ Parking Brake

1Parking Brake

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.
To apply:
Pull the lever fully up without pressing the
release button.

NOTICE

Release the parking brake fully before driving. The
rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive
with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking
brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.

To release:
1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold
the release button.

Driving

2. Lower the lever down all the way, then
release the button.

TOC

Index
Home
Continued

439

uuBrakinguBrake System

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist
helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases
the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 442
2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 441

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

440

1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be
replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear. With manual transmission use a lower
gear for greater engine braking.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

uuBrakinguABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

2013 Accord Coupe

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
■ ABS
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”

■ ABS operation

When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

NOTICE

The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
• When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
• When tire chains are installed.

TOC
Driving

The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

QRG
1ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.

Index
Home

441

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

QRG

Brake Assist System
■ Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

■ Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

442

2013 Accord Coupe

Parking Your Vehicle
2013 Accord Coupe

When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Automatic transmission/CVT models

QRG
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P .
1When Stopped
Manual transmission models

3. Move the shift lever to (R .
4. Turn off the engine.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

Automatic transmission/CVT models

NOTICE

The following can damage the transmission:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
• Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.

TOC
Driving

Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.

Index
Home

443

Multi-View Rear Camera
QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Models with two displays/Models with navigation system

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display
automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R .

■ Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
Wide View Mode
Guidelines

Bumper

TOC

Normal View Mode

Camera

Driving

Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)

Top Down View Mode

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 273

Approx. 79 inches (2 m)
Approx. 118 inches (3 m)

You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the
selector knob to switch the angle.

Index
Home

444

If the last used viewing mode is Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next
time you shift into (R . If Top View was last used, Wide mode is selected.

Fixed Guideline
On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R .
Off: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guideline
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
Off: Guidelines do not move.

Rearview Camera
2013 Accord Coupe

Models with one display

QRG

About Your Rearview Camera

1About Your Rearview Camera

The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.
The display automatically changes to a rear view when the shift lever is
moved to (R .

■ Rearview Camera Display Area
Guidelines

Bumper

Approx. 118 in (3 m)
Approx. 79 in (2 m)
Approx. 39 in (1 m)

Approx. 79 in (2 m)
Approx. 118 in (3 m)

The rearview camera has a unique lens that makes objects appear closer or further
than they actually are.

Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 273

TOC
Driving

Camera
Approx. 20 in (0.5 m)
Approx. 39 in (1 m)

The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.

Fixed Guideline
On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R .
Off: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guideline
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
Off: Guidelines do not move.

Index
Home

445

Refueling
QRG

■ Fuel recommendation
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.

■ Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

TOC
Driving

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

■ Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 liters)
Index
Home

446

2013 Accord Coupe

Fuel Information
1Fuel Information
NOTICE

We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

2013 Accord Coupe

How to Refuel

QRG
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.

Push

2. Turn off the engine.
3. Push on the fuel fill door release handle at
the foot of the driver’s seat.
u The fuel fill door opens.
4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.

1How to Refuel

3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.

5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.
6. Insert the filler nozzle fully.
u When the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will
click off automatically. This leaves space
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands
with a change in the temperature.

Holder

7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening
it until you hear it click at least once.
u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

Driving

Cap
Cap

If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.

TOC

Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.

Index
Home

447

Fuel Economy
QRG

Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your
driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and
other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
information display.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.

TOC
Driving

Index
Home

448

2013 Accord Coupe

Improving Fuel Economy

• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.

1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
Miles driven

Gallons of
fuel

Miles per
Gallon

100

Liter

Kilometers

L per 100 km

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/

Accessories and Modifications
2013 Accord Coupe

Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
2 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) * P. 424
2 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) * P. 428

• Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
side curtain airbags.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.

QRG
1Accessories and Modifications

3 WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.

2 Fuses P. 524

• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.

TOC
Driving

Modifications

Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its
handling, stability, and reliability.
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is
properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

449

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

TOC

Index
Home

450

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 452
Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 453

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 454
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 455
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 459

Opening the Hood ........................... 461
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 463
Oil Check ......................................... 464
Adding Engine Oil ............................ 466
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 467

Engine Coolant ................................ 469
Transmission Fluid............................ 471
Brake/Clutch Fluid............................ 473
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 474
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 475

Checking and Maintaining Wiper
Blades .......................................... 483
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 485
Tire and Loading Information Label ...... 486

Tire Labeling .................................... 486

Tire Service Life................................ 490
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 491
Tire Rotation.................................... 492
Winter Tires ..................................... 493
Battery............................................... 494
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 495
Climate Control System Maintenance .. 497

Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 498
Exterior Care.................................... 500

Index

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......488

Wear Indicators................................ 490

Home

451

Before Performing Maintenance
QRG

For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and
inspection information.

■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance
■ Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.

■ Periodic inspections
• Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Brake/Clutch Fluid P. 473

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

452

2013 Accord Coupe

Inspection and Maintenance

• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 485

1Inspection and Maintenance
U.S. models

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 457
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 541

• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 475

• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 483

If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance

Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform
a given task.

■ Maintenance Safety
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.

• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.

QRG
1Safety When Performing Maintenance

3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner's manual.

3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner's manual.

TOC
Maintenance

■ Vehicle Safety

2013 Accord Coupe

Index
Home

453

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

QRG

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

454

2013 Accord Coupe

Maintenance MinderTM
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the information display every time you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your
vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.

To Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Displaying the Engine Oil Life

1Displaying the Engine Oil Life

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Press the
(Select/Reset) knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life appears on the
information display.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0

Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 to 91
90 to 81
80 to 71
70 to 61
60 to 51
50 to 41
40 to 31
30 to 21
20 to 16
15 to 11
10 to 6
5 to 1
0

TOC
Maintenance

The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays
on in the instrument panel after the engine oil
life becomes 0%. Have the indicated
maintenance done by a dealer immediately.

Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.

Index
Home
Continued

455

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display
To switch the display, press the
Oil Life Display

(Select/Reset) knob.
Explanation

Information

The engine oil life indicator starts
to appear along with other due
soon maintenance item codes
when the remaining oil life
becomes 15 percent.

The engine oil is approaching the
end of its service life.

The remaining engine oil life has
passed its service life, and a
negative distance appears after
driving over 10 miles (U.S. models)
or 10 km (Canadian models). The
negative distance on the display
blinks.

The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced
immediately.

Maintenance Minder Indicator

Starts to come on when the
remaining engine oil life becomes
15 percent.
The SERVICE message also starts The engine oil has almost reached
It goes off when the display is
to appear along with the engine oil the end of its service life, and the
switched.
maintenance
items
should
be
life indicator and the maintenance
inspected and serviced as soon as
item codes.
possible.

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

456

Stays on as a reminder even when
the display is switched.

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Maintenance Service Items
Maintenance
Minder Indicator

1Maintenance Service Items

• Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

Maintenance Minder
Message

• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles
(256,000 km).

• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.

Main Item

CODE
A
B

●
●
●
●
●
●

●
●
●
●

*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE
1
2

●
●
●
●

3
4

●
●
●
●

5

●

Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*4,*5
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: 6-cylinder models
*5: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110 °F, 43 °C), in very low temperatures (under 20 °F, -29 °C), or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.

TOC
Maintenance

●

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Inspect suspension components
Inspect driveshaft boots
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections#

Sub Items

Index
Home
Continued

457

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Resetting the Display

1Resetting the Display

Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly
pressing the
(Select/Reset) knob.
3. Press and hold the
knob for ten seconds
or more.
u The engine oil life indicator and the
maintenance item codes blink.

The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.

4. Press the
knob for five seconds or more.
u The displayed maintenance items
disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.

You can reset the engine oil life display using the
audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 273

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

458

NOTICE

Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

4-cylinder models

Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)

Manual transmission
models

Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange Handle)

Clutch Fluid
(Light Gray Cap)

Engine Oil Fill Cap
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)

Battery

TOC
Maintenance

Engine Coolant
Reservoir

Radiator Cap

Index
Home
Continued

459

uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
6-cylinder models

Engine Oil Fill Cap
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange Handle)

Manual transmission
models

Clutch Fluid
(Light Gray Cap)
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Battery

TOC

Engine Coolant
Reservoir

Maintenance

Index
Home

460

Radiator Cap

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

2013 Accord Coupe

Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle

QRG
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.

1Opening the Hood
NOTICE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.

Pull
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.

3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center
of the hood to release the lock mechanism,
and open the hood.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

TOC

Lever
Support Rod
Grip

Clamp

4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.

Maintenance

4-cylinder models

Index
Home

Continued

461

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
6-cylinder models

4. Lift the hood up most of the way.
u The hydraulic supports will lift it up the
rest of the way and hold it up.
When closing, lower it to approximately 12
inches (30 cm), then press down firmly with
your hands.

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

462

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

2013 Accord Coupe

Recommended Engine Oil
• Genuine Honda Motor Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.

QRG
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.

This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown.

TOC
Maintenance

Ambient Temperature

■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.

Index
Home

463

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check
the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange handle).
4-cylinder models
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.

6-cylinder models

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

464

1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil being careful not to overfill.

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

4-cylinder models

Upper Mark
Lower Mark
6-cylinder models

Upper Mark
Lower Mark

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

465

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.

4-cylinder models

2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
6-cylinder models

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

466

Engine Oil Fill Cap

1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it up immediately. Spilled oil may
damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE

Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

2013 Accord Coupe

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

QRG

You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the
information display.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
4-cylinder models
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE

You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.

Washer

Drain Bolt

3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.

6-cylinder models

TOC

Washer

Maintenance

Drain Bolt

Index
Home
Continued

467

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
4-cylinder models

Oil Filter

6-cylinder models

4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil gasket.
7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
4-cylinder models

30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
6-cylinder models

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

468

Oil Filter

29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

4.4 US qt (4.2 L)
4.5 US qt (4.3 L)
9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

2013 Accord Coupe

Engine Coolant

QRG
1Engine Coolant

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

■ Reserve Tank
1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.

Reserve
Tank

MAX
MIN

NOTICE

If temperatures consistently below −22°F (−30°C) are
expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to
a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more
information.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.

2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.

TOC
Maintenance

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle's coolant system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.

3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Index
Home
Continued

469

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Radiator

1Radiator

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
Radiator Cap

2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and
relieve any pressure in the coolant system.
Do not push the cap down when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

470

6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.

3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

2013 Accord Coupe

Transmission Fluid

QRG

4-cylinder models with automatic transmission (CVT)

■ Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid

1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
NOTICE

Specified fluid: HCF-2

Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may
adversely affect the operation and durability of your
vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's
new vehicle warranty.

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

4-cylinder/6-cylinder models with manual transmission

■ Manual Transmission Fluid

1Manual Transmission Fluid

Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

TOC
Maintenance

If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API
certificated SAE 0 W-20 or 5 W-20 viscosity motor oil
as a temporary measure.
Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does
not contain the proper additives for the transmission
and continued use can cause decreased shifting
performance and lead to transmission damage.

Specified fluid: Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)

Index
Home
Continued

471

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
6-cylinder models with automatic transmission

■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

1Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE

Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other
transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF
DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and
durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage
the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered
by Honda's new vehicle warranty.

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

472

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch Fluid

2013 Accord Coupe

Brake/Clutch Fluid

QRG

Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch.

■ Checking the Brake Fluid
Brake Reservoir

The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.

MAX

1Brake/Clutch Fluid
NOTICE

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

MIN

If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect for leaks or worn brake pads as
soon as possible.

TOC

■ Checking the Clutch Fluid

1Checking the Clutch Fluid

The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.

Clutch Reservoir

If the clutch fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect for leaks or an excessively worn
clutch plate as soon as possible.

Maintenance

Manual transmission models

MAX
MIN

Index
Home

473

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

QRG

Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
Canadian models

If the washer fluid is low, the washer level
indicator comes on.

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

474

2013 Accord Coupe

Refilling Window Washer Fluid
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.

Replacing Light Bulbs
2013 Accord Coupe

Headlight Bulbs

QRG

When replacing, use the following bulbs.

1Headlight Bulbs

High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)
Low beam headlight:
Low beam headlight:

NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.

LED type *
55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type) *

■ High Beam Headlight
Holding Clip

Driver side
6-cylinder models

1. Unlock the holding clips, then remove the
upper part of the air intake duct and the air
intake tube.
Tube

Holding Clips
Passenger side

1. Remove the engine coolant reservoir.

When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
The exterior lights' inside lenses (headlights, brake
lamps, etc.) may fog temporarily after a car wash or
while driving in the rain. This does not impact the
exterior light function.
However, if you see a large amount of water or ice
accumulated inside the lenses, have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.

TOC
Maintenance

All models

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the
aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

Continued

475

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
Bulb

Coupler

3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.

1High Beam Headlight
Holding clip

Press down the central pin until it clicks to unlock it.

4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Tab

Central pin
Push the central pin back to lock the clip. Then, insert
the clip into the hole and press on the central pin
until it is flat.

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

476

Push until
the pin is
flat.

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Low Beam Headlights

1Low Beam Headlights

Models with halogen low beam headlights

1. Push the tab to remove the coupler.

Bulb

2. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.

Models with LED low beam headlights

Low beam headlight bulbs are LED type. Have an
authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
bulbs.

3. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
Coupler

4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

Tab

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

477

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs *

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Fog Light Bulbs *
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Fog Light: 35 W (H8)

1Fog Light Bulbs *
NOTICE

1. Remove the screw using a Phillips-head
screwdriver and carefully pull the fog light
assembly out of the bumper.

Screw

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,
or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
The fog lights are halogen bulbs.
When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
Bulb

3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
Tab

TOC

4. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it to the right.

Maintenance

5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Coupler

Index
Home

478

* Not available on all models

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs

2013 Accord Coupe

Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light: 28/8 W (Amber)
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the
opposite side from the light being replaced.
Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel
to the left.
Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the
right.
2. Remove the holding clips and screw, and
pull the inner fender back.

Holding Clip

Screw

3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Bulb

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs *

Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the
central pin to remove the clip.
Central pin

Insert the clip with the central pin raised, and push
until it is flat.

Push until the
pin is flat.

TOC
Maintenance

Socket

QRG
1Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs

Door mirrors have the side turn lights. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light bulbs.

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

479

uuReplacing Light BulbsuParking/Daytime Running Light Bulbs

QRG

Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights

Parking/Daytime Running Light Bulbs
Parking/daytime running light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light bulbs.
Models with bulb type parking lights

Parking Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Parking Light: 5 W
Bulb

Tab

Driver side

1. Remove the upper part of the air intake
duct and the air intake tube.
2 High Beam Headlight P. 475
Passenger side

TOC

Coupler

1. Remove the engine coolant reservoir.
2 High Beam Headlight P. 475

Maintenance

Socket
Both sides

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.

Index
Home

480

2013 Accord Coupe

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs

Brake/Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal
Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Brake/Taillight: 21/5 W
Back-Up Light: 16 W
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
Rear Side Marker Light: 3CP
Cargo Hook

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
1Brake/Taillight, Back-Up Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear
Side Marker Light Bulbs
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,
then lift and remove the clip.

Clip

1. Remove the cargo hook by squeezing the
tabs on both sides.

Tabs

2. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.

Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is
flat.

Holding Clip

3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.

TOC
Push until the
pin is flat.

Maintenance

4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Bulb
Socket

Index
Home

481

uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs

QRG

Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Rear License Plate Light: 5 W
1. Remove the lens by carefully prying on its
left edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver.

Lens

2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

TOC
Maintenance

Bulb

High-Mount Brake Light Bulbs
High-mount brake light bulbs are the LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light bulbs.

Index
Home

482

2013 Accord Coupe

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
2013 Accord Coupe

Checking Wiper Blades

QRG

If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the metal wiper
arm may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber

1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber

1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.

Tab

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.

2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the blade
from the wiper arm.

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home
Continued

483

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
3. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by
pulling the tabbed end out.

Blade

Top
Retainer
Blade

4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade
that has been removed, and mount to a
new rubber blade.
u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and
the retainer grooves.

TOC
Maintenance

5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
u The tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade.

Indent

6. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,
then push down the lock tab.
Tab

Index
Home

484

7. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.

Checking and Maintaining Tires
2013 Accord Coupe

Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

■ Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 490

• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.

3 WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if
checked when cold.
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must
calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 435
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.

TOC
Maintenance

■ Inspection guidelines

QRG
1Checking Tires

Index
Home

485

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label

QRG

The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Label
Example

Tire Labeling
Example

The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.

Maintenance

Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size

■ Tire Sizes

Home

486

1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.

1Tire Sizes

Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)

TOC

Index

2013 Accord Coupe

Tire and Loading Information Label

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
215/55R17 94V
215: Tire width in millimeters.
55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R:

Tire construction code (R indicates radial).

17: Rim diameter in inches.
94: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

■ Glossary of Tire Terminology
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week

Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.

Maintenance

Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

TOC

Index
Home

487

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are
also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to
Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains
these gradings.

■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread
houlder and maximum section width.

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A

■ Treadwear

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

488

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphat and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

■ Temperature

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is
abased on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

1Temperature

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.

TOC
Maintenance

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heate when
te sted under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

1Traction

Index
Home

489

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Wear Indicators
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark

The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.

1Checking Tires
6-cylinder models

High speed driving
We recommend that you do not drive faster than the
posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive
at sustained high speeds (over 99 mph or 160 km/h),
adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to
avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire failure.
Tire Size
Pressure

Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

490

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

235/45R18 94V
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

2013 Accord Coupe

Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause the ABS and VSA® (vehicle stability assist)
system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

QRG
1Tire and Wheel Replacement

3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.

TOC
Maintenance

Index
Home

491

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display
helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.

■ Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.

Front

1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

FRONT
Direction Mark

■ Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.

TOC
Front

Index
Home

492

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the
TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 435

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires

2013 Accord Coupe

Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire
chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
Models with 215/55R17 tires

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1036
Models with 235/45R18 tires

Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1040
• Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.

QRG
1Winter Tires

3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
NOTICE

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.

TOC
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.

Index
Home

493

Battery
QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Checking the Battery
Check the battery condition monthly. Look at
the test indicator window and check the
terminals for corrosion.

Test Indicator Window

The battery condition is being monitored by
the sensor on the negative terminal. If there is
a problem with the sensor, the warning
message on the information display will let
you know. Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.

If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 151

1Battery

3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing
and a face shield, or have a skilled
technician do it.

• The clock resets.
2 Setting the Clock P. 84

TOC

• The navigation system * is disabled.
2 Refer to the navigation system manual

Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.

WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
The test indicator's color information is on the
battery.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry
the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help
prevent future corrosion.

Index
Home

494

* Not available on all models

Remote Transmitter Care
2013 Accord Coupe

Replacing the Button Battery

QRG

If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

NOTICE

■ Master Keys with Remote Transmitter *
Screw

1Replacing the Button Battery
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.

Battery type: CR1620
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillipshead screwdriver.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.

2. Open the remote transmitter.
u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratching the
transmitter.
Battery

3. Remove the button battery with the small
flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.

TOC

Index
Home
* Not available on all models

Continued

495

uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Smart Entry Remote *
Battery type: CR2032
1. Remove the built-in key.

Battery

TOC

2. Remove the upper half of the cover by
carefully prying on the edge with a coin.
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the smart entry remote.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.

Index
Home

496

* Not available on all models

Climate Control System Maintenance
2013 Accord Coupe

Dust and Pollen Filter
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects
pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let
you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.

QRG
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system
deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up
easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please
contact a dealer for replacement.

TOC

Index
Home

497

Cleaning
QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

■ Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.

Opening

TOC

Index
Home

498

1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire
inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
off using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

uuCleaninguInterior Care

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Floor Mats
Front (driver side)

Unlock

Lock

Rear (passenger side)

1Floor Mats

The floor mats for the driver, and the rear
passenger on the passenger’s side hook over
the floor anchors, which keep the mats from
sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning,
turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.

If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mat.

Unlock

Lock

TOC

■ Maintaining Genuine Leather *
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats
and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and
10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or
dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

Index
Home

* Not available on all models

499

uuCleaninguExterior Care

QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

■ Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:

1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents or engine
compartment. It can cause a malfunction.

• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.

■ Using an Automated Car Wash
TOC

Fold in the door mirrors. Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the
automated car wash.

■ Using High Pressure Cleaners
• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.

Index
Home

500

Air Intake Vents

uuCleaninguExterior Care

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.

■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.

■ Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels

1Applying Wax
NOTICE

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe up
spills immediately.

1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.

1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.

TOC

Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.
Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or
a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that
helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.

Index
Home

501

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Index
Home

502

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools
Types of Tools .................................. 504
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 505
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine ........................ 511

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is
Weak..........................................512
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 513
Jump Starting.................................... 514
Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 517

Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 518
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes On ................................ 520
If the Charging System Indicator
Comes On ..................................... 520
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 521

If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On .................................. 522
If the EPS System Indicator Comes On.. 522

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 523
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 524
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 526
Emergency Towing........................... 527

Index
Home

503

Tools
QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Types of Tools
1Types of Tools

The tools were stored in the trunk.
Jack

Tool Case

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

Index
Home

504

Wheel Nut Wrench/
Jack Handle

Jack Handle Bar

If a Tire Goes Flat
2013 Accord Coupe

Changing a Flat Tire

QRG

If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the parking
brake.
Automatic transmission/CVT models

1Changing a Flat Tire
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model.

2. Move the shift lever to (P .

Do not use another type of compact spare tire or
wheel with your vehicle.

2. Move the shift lever to (R .
All models

3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1

.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

Handling the Unexpected

Do not use them with another vehicle.

Manual transmission models

TOC

Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Home
Continued

505

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1. Open the trunk floor lid.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. Take
the jack and wheel nut wrench out of the
tool case.

Tool Case

3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.

Spare Tire

TOC

4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

Index
The tire to be replaced.

Home

506

Wheel
Blocks

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.

Handling the Unexpected

6. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.

TOC

Index
Home
Continued

507

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ How to Set Up the Jack

1How to Set Up the Jack

1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.

3 WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Turn the end bracket (as shown in the
image) clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.

TOC

Index
Home

508

3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.

Jack
Handle
Bar

Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
their shape may not match.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely.
• Do not use while the engine is running.
• Use only where the ground is firm and level.
• Use only at the jacking points.
• Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
• Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Replacing the Flat Tire

1Replacing the Flat Tire

1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, and stop
rotating.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)

Handling the Unexpected

2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.

TOC

Index
Home
Continued

509

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Storing the Flat Tire
1. Remove the center cap.

Spacer
Cone

2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare
tire well.

Wing
Bolt

For
compact
spare tire
Handling the Unexpected

TOC

Index
Home

510

1Storing the Flat Tire

For
full-size
tire

3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely put the jack and wheel nut
wrench back in the tool case. Store the case
in the trunk.

■ TPMS and the Spare Tire
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the
indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on, but this is normal.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 435

3 WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.

Engine Does Not Start
2013 Accord Coupe

Checking the Engine

QRG

If the engine does not start, check the starter.

1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 514

Starter condition
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.

Checklist
Check brightness of the interior light.
Turn on interior lights and check brightness.
● If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all

The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with the
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.

Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again.

2 Battery P. 494
●

If the interior lights come on normally

2 Starting the Engine P. 401

Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2 Immobilizer System P. 101

Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank.
2 Fuel Gauge P. 79

Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.

Handling the Unexpected

2 Fuses P. 524

TOC

2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 526

If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 527

Index
Home

511

uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

QRG

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

Index
Home

512

2013 Accord Coupe

Models with smart entry system

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
If the beeper sounds, the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes,
and the engine won’t start, start the engine as follows.
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the smart
entry remote while the indicator on the
ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing.
The buttons on the smart entry remote
should be facing you.
u The indicator flashes for about 30
seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal (automatic
transmission) or clutch pedal (manual
transmission) and press the ENGINE
START/STOP button within 10 seconds
after the beeper sounds and the indicator
stays on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop

2013 Accord Coupe

Models with smart entry system

QRG

Emergency Engine Stop
If you cannot stop the engine by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button, do
either of the following operations:
• Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.

1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the button while driving unless it is
absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched
off.

• Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button two times.
The steering wheel will not lock.
Automatic transmission/CVT models

Manual transmission models

The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.

Handling the Unexpected

The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF with the shift lever in (P , and to
ACCESSORY with the shift lever in any position other than (P .

TOC

Index
Home

513

Jump Starting
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Jump Starting Procedure

1Jump Starting

Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your
4-cylinder models
vehicle's battery + terminal.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
Handling the Unexpected

TOC

Index
Home

514

Booster Battery
6-cylinder models

Booster Battery

3. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.

3 WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.

uuJump Startingu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
4-cylinder models

4. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt
as shown.
Do not connect this jumper cable to any
other part.

1Jump Starting
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.

5. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
6-cylinder models

Handling the Unexpected

6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

TOC

Index
Home
Continued

515

uuJump Startingu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's battery + terminal.
Handling the Unexpected

TOC

Index
Home

516

4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

Shift Lever Does Not Move
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Automatic transmission/CVT models

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.

■ Releasing the Lock
1. Set the parking brake.
Models without smart entry system

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

2. Remove the built-in key from the smart
entry remote.
All models

Cover

3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.

Shift Lock
Release Slot

5. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever
into (N .
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.

Handling the Unexpected

Slot

TOC

Index

Release Button

Home

517

Overheating
QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:

1How to Handle Overheating

• The temperature gauge needle is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses
power.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.

■ First thing to do

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

Index
Home

518

3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.

1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.

2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.

Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge
needle at the H mark may damage the engine.

NOTICE

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Next thing to do

1How to Handle Overheating

Reserve Tank

MAX
MIN

1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature
gauge needle comes down.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.

■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.
If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone
down, contact a dealer for repairs.

Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.

3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.

TOC

Index
Home

519

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.

■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.

1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.

■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about one minute.

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
u The light goes out: Start driving again.
u The light does not go out within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and
contact a dealer for repairs immediately.

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.

■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical
systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.

Index
Home

520

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

2013 Accord Coupe

If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp Comes On or Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink

■ Check Fuel Cap Message
■ The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.

■ What to do when the message appears:
1. Stop the engine.
2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE

If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
Handling the Unexpected

• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
ten minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

QRG

TOC

3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off.

■ When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

Index

Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described
above.

Home

521

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

QRG

U.S.

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.

Canada

■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.

Handling the Unexpected

TOC

Home

522

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.

If the EPS System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.
• If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.

■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.

Index

2013 Accord Coupe

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On

1If the EPS System Indicator Comes On
NOTICE

If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
the full left or right position for a while, the system
heats up. The system goes into a protective mode,
and limits its performance. The steering wheel
becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the
system cools down, EPS is restored. Repeated
operation under these conditions can eventually
damage the system.

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

2013 Accord Coupe

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
Indicator Comes On or Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated.
If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed,
the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.

■ What to do when the indicator comes on

■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.
The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
uCalibrate the TPMS after a full-size tire is reinstalled.

1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

Handling the Unexpected

Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
uCalibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.

QRG

TOC

Index
Home

523

Fuses
QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
Handling the Unexpected

524

IG Main 2*4

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1

Home

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

IG Main 1

TOC

Index

3

Circuit Protected
−
−
−
−
Front Fog Light *
Horn
Stop Light
FI Sub
DRL
IG Coil
Injector*2
Hazard
Fuse Box Main 2
Fuse Box Option 2

2

Circuit Protected
Battery
EPS
Fuse Box Main 1
Fuse Box Option 1
−
−
ABS/VSA FSR
ABS/VSA Motor

Amps
125 A
70 A
(60 A)
(40 A)
−
−
40 A
30 A

12

Sub Fan Motor

Headlight Low Beam Main
Fuse Box
Wiper Motor
Main Fan Motor
Starter Motor*4
13
Rear Defogger
14
Heater Motor
15
FI Main

Amps
−
−
−
−
(15 A)
10 A
10 A
15 A
(7.5 A)
15 A
20 A
15 A
60 A
(40 A)
50 A
30 A*4
30 A
20 A*2
30 A*3
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
15 A

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Circuit Protected
Heated Door Mirror *
MG Clutch
DBW
Small Light
Interior Light
Back Up
Audio
Fan Timer

24 Right Headlight Low Beam
25

Left Headlight Low Beam

26

−

Amps
(10 A)
7.5 A
15 A
20 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
15 A*5
10 A
15 A*5
−

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
*2:4-cylinder models
*3:6-cylinder models
*4:Models with smart entry system
*5:Models with LED low beam headlights

* Not available on all models

uuFusesuFuse Locations

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Interior Fuse Box

10
11
12
13

Located under the dashboard.

14
15
Fuse Label

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Circuit Protected
A/C
DRL
−
−
Meter
SRS
Option *
MISS SOL
Fuel Pump

* Not available on all models

Amps
7.5 A
7.5 A
−
−
7.5 A
7.5 A
(7.5 A)
10 A
20 A

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

Amps
7.5 A
−
7.5 A
15 A
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
−
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
(10 A)
10 A
15 A
(10 A)
20 A

33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h

Circuit Protected
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
Rear Driver Side Power
Window *
Rear Passenger Side Power
Window *
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding *
ACCESSORY
−
Left Headlight High Beam
Accessory Power Socket
(Console Panel)
Driver Side Rear Door Lock *
Door Lock
Audio *
ACM *
Rear Seat Heaters *
Premium Amp *
−
−
Passenger’s Power Seat
Reclining *
Passenger’s Power Seat
Sliding *

Amps
20 A
20 A
20 A
(20 A)
7.5 A
−
10 A
20 A
10 A
20 A
(7.5 A)
(20 A)
(15 A)
(20 A)
−
−

Handling the Unexpected

Fuse locations are shown on the label on
the side panel.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.

16
17
18

Circuit Protected
ABS/VSA
−
Front Wiper
ACG
Rear Accessory Power Socket
(Console Compartment)
Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining *
Moonroof *
Front Seat Heaters *
−
Passenger Side Door
Unlock
Driver Side Rear Door
Unlock *
Driver’s Door Lock
Passenger Side Door Lock
Driver’s Door Unlock
SRS
Illumination
Key Lock
Parking Lights
Lumbar Support *
Right Headlight High Beam
Washer
SMART *
Driver’s Power Window

TOC

(20 A)
(20 A)

Index
Home

525

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

QRG

Blown Fuse

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.

Combined
Fuse

Handling the Unexpected

Fuse Puller

3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.

TOC

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Index
Home

526

2013 Accord Coupe

Inspecting and Changing Fuses
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE

Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 524 to 525.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.

Emergency Towing
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

■ Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

■ Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing
NOTICE

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE

Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Handling the Unexpected

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.

TOC

Index
Home

527

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Index
Home

528

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 530
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...... 534

Engine Number and Transmission
Number...................................... 534

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 537
Warranty Coverages ........................ 539
Authorized Manuals......................... 541
Customer Service Information......... 542

Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 535
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 536

Index
Home

529

Specifications
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
■ Engine Specifications

4-cylinder models

■ Vehicle Specifications

Displacement

Model
No. of Passengers:
Front
Rear
Total
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating

Honda Accord Coupe

Spark Plugs

2
3
5

■ Fuel

U.S.: 4,189 lbs (1,900 kg)*1
4,255 lbs (1,930 kg)*2
Canada: 1,900 kg*3
1,930 kg*4

■ Battery

Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)

Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)

Information

TOC

Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type
Charge Quantity
Lubricant Type
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:

Fuel:
Type
Fuel Tank Capacity

U.S.: 2,271 lbs (1,030 kg)*1
2,315 lbs (1,050 kg)*2
Canada: 1,040 kg*3
1,055 kg*4
*1

U.S.: 1,962 lbs (890 kg)
2,006 lbs (910 kg)*2
Canada: 890 kg*3
910 kg*4

144 cu-in (2,356 cm3)
NGK
DILKAR7G11GS
DENSO
DXE22HQR-D11S
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
17.2 US gal (65 ℓ)

Capacity/Type

38AH(5)/47AH(20)
52AH(5)/65AH(20)*5

*5: Canadian models

■ Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity

U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 5.12 US qt (4.85 ℓ)

■ Light Bulbs
Headlights (Low Beam)
55W (H11)
Headlights (High Beam)
60W (HB3)
Fog Lights *
35W (H8)
Parking Lights
5W
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights 28/8W (Amber)
Side Turn Signal Lights
LED
(on Door Mirrors) *
Brake/Taillights
Rear Side Marker Lights
Back-Up Lights
Rear Turn Signal Lights
High-Mount Brake Light
Rear License Plate Lights
Trunk Light
Interior Lights
Map Lights
Ceiling Light
Vanity Mirror Lights

21/5W
3CP
16W
21W (Amber)
LED
5W
5W
8W
8W
1.4W

HFC-134a (R-134a)
15.0 – 16.8 oz (425 – 475 g)
ND-OIL 8

LX-S models
Except LX-S models
LX models
Except LX models

Index
Home

530

* Not available on all models

uuSpecificationsu

2013 Accord Coupe
■ Brake/Clutch Fluid
Specified

■ Engine Oil

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

■ Automatic Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Specified
Capacity

HCF-2
Change

3.7 US qt (3.5 ℓ)

Recommended

Capacity

■ Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified
Capacity

Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
Change
2.0 US qt (1.9 ℓ)

·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Change
4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
Change
including
4.4 US qt (4.2 ℓ)
filter

Regular

■ Engine Coolant

Compact
Spare

Specified
Ratio

Wheel Size

Capacity

QRG

■ Tire

Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
50/50 with distilled water
1.65 US gal (6.25 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.17 US gal (0.64 ℓ) in the reserve tank)

Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Front
Rear
Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Regular
Compact Spare

215/55R17 94V

33 (225 [2.3])
33 (225 [2.3])
T125/80D16 97M
60 (420 [4.2])
17 x 7 1/2J
16 x 4T

Information

TOC

Index
Home
Continued

531

uuSpecificationsu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
■ Engine Specifications

6-cylinder models

■ Vehicle Specifications

Displacement

Model
No. of Passengers:
Front
Rear
Total
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating

Honda Accord Coupe

Spark Plugs

2
3
5

■ Fuel

U.S.: 4,387 lbs (1,990 kg)*1
4,475 lbs (2,030 kg)*2
Canada: 1,990 kg*1
2,030 kg*2

■ Battery

Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)

Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)

Information

Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type
Charge Quantity
Lubricant Type

U.S.: 2,403 lbs (1,090 kg)*1
2,513 lbs (1,140 kg)*2
Canada: 1,090 kg*1
1,145 kg*2
U.S.: 2,006 lbs (910 kg)
Canada: 910 kg

Fuel:
Type
Fuel Tank Capacity

212 cu-in (3,471 cm3)
NGK
ILZKR7B11
DENSO
SXU22HCR11
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
17.2 US gal (65 ℓ)

Capacity/Type

60AH(5)/72AH(20)

■ Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity

U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 5.12 US qt (4.85 ℓ)

■ Light Bulbs
55W (H11)
LED *
Headlights (High Beam)
60W (HB3)
Fog Lights
35W (H8)
Parking/Daytime Running Lights
LED
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights 28/8W (Amber)
Side Turn Signal Lights
LED
(on Door Mirrors)
Brake/Taillights
21/5W
Rear Side Marker Lights
3CP
Back-Up Lights
16W
Rear Turn Signal Lights
21W (Amber)
High-Mount Brake Light
LED
Rear License Plate Lights
5W
Trunk Light
5W
Interior Lights
Map Lights
8W
Ceiling Light
8W
Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W
Courtesy Lights
2CP
Headlights (Low Beam)

HFC-134a (R-134a)
15.0 – 16.8 oz (425 – 475 g)
ND-OIL 8

*1: Manual transmission models
*2: Automatic transmission models

TOC

Index
Home

532

* Not available on all models

uuSpecificationsu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
■ Brake/Clutch Fluid
Specified

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified
Capacity

Honda ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid)
Change
3.3 US qt (3.1 ℓ)

■ Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified
Capacity

Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
Change
2.2 US qt (2.1 ℓ)

■ Engine Oil
Recommended

Capacity

■ Tire
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Change
4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
Change
including
4.5 US qt (4.3 ℓ)
filter

Regular

■ Engine Coolant

Compact
Spare

Specified
Ratio

Wheel Size

Capacity

Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
50/50 with distilled water
1.7 US gal (6.3 ℓ)*1
1.7 US gal (6.5 ℓ)*2
(change including the remaining
0.17 US gal (0.64 ℓ) in the reserve tank)

Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Front
Rear
Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Regular
Compact Spare

235/45R18 94V

33 (225 [2.3])
32 (220 [2.2])
T125/80D16 97M
60 (420 [4.2])
18 x 8J
16 x 4T

*1: Manual transmission models
*2: Automatic transmission models

Information

TOC

Index
Home

533

Identification Numbers
QRG

2013 Accord Coupe

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. See the
image below for the VIN locations.

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.

Engine Number and Transmission Number
See the image below for the locations of your vehicle's engine number and
transmission number.
Vehicle Identification Number
Cover
4-cylinder models

Engine Number
Automatic Transmission
(CVT) Number
Information

Manual Transmission
Number
Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number
6-cylinder models

TOC
Engine Number

Index

Manual Transmission
Number

Home

Automatic Transmission
Number

534

Devices that Emit Radio Waves
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in
operation.
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Universal Transceiver
Immobilizer System
Keyless Access System
Remote Transmitter
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.

Information

As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.

TOC

Index
Home

535

Reporting Safety Defects
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.

Information

TOC

Index
Home

536

In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510.
For more information on
.
reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety

Emissions Testing
2013 Accord Coupe

Testing of Readiness Codes

QRG

Your vehicle uses “readiness codes,” as part of its onboard self diagnostic system.
Some states refer to these codes during testing to see if your vehicle's emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read if you go through the testing just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, without starting the
engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are
not set.

1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).

5. Keep the vehicle in (P (automatic transmission/CVT) or (N (manual
transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about
3 minutes.

Information

4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.

TOC

6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.

Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued

Home

537

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D (automatic/CVT) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise control. When traffic
allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds
because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.

Information

TOC

Index
Home

538

Warranty Coverages
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.

Information

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

TOC

Index
Home
Continued

539

uuWarranty Coveragesu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2013 Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2013 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

Information

TOC

Index
Home

540

Authorized Manuals
2013 Accord Coupe

■ Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.

■ For U.S. Owners:

QRG
1Authorized Manuals
For Canadian Owners:
Si vous avez besoin d'un Manuel du Conducteur en
français, veuillez demander à votre concessionnaire
de commander le numéro de pièce 33T3LC00

The publications listed below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can
order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at
www.helminc.com.
Make an inquiry to Helm Inc. at (800) 782-4356 if you are interested in ordering
other models' or other years' manuals.

Information

Publication
Form Description
Form Number
31T3L600
2013 Honda Accord Coupe Owner’s Manual
31T2A800
2013 Honda Accord Navigation System Manual
31T2AM00
2013 Honda Accord Service History
31T3LA00
2013 Honda Accord Coupe Technology Reference Guide (LX-S)
31T3LB00
2013 Honda Accord Coupe Technology Reference Guide (EX/EX-L)
2013 Honda Accord Coupe Technology Reference Guide
31T3LC00
(EX-L with Navigation)
Order Form for Previous YearsHON-R
Indicate Year and Model Desired

TOC

Index
Home

541

Customer Service Information
2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that
your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the
dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.

U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Services
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009

Information

TOC

Index
Home

542

In Puerto Rico and
the U.S. Virgin Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546

Canadian Owners:
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com

1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
• Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
P. 534
• Date of purchase
• Odometer reading of your vehicle
• Your name, address, and telephone number
• A detailed description of the problem
• Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

uuCustomer Service Informationu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

■ Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB)

■ Gracenote® END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT

This application or device contains software
from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville,
California (“Gracenote”). The software
from Gracenote (the “Gracenote
Software”) enables this application to
perform disc and/or file identification and
obtain music- related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or

embedded databases (collectively,
“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data
only by means of the intended End-User
functions or this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal noncommercial use only.
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer, or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any
Gracenote Data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to
use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If
your license terminates, you agree to cease
any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers.

Information

Music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content
delivery.
For more information, visit
www.gracenote.com.
When music is recorded to the HDD from a
CD, information such as the recording artist
and track name are retrieved from the
Gracenote Database and displayed (when
available).
Gracenote may not contain information for
all albums.
Gracenote is an internet-based music
recognition service that allows artist, album,
and track information from CDs to display
on the HDD.
Gracenote users are allowed 4 free updates
a year. More information about Gracenote,
its features, and downloads are available at

www.honda.com (in U.S.) or
www.honda.ca (in Canada).
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000 to present
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000 to present Gracenote.
One or more patents owned by Gracenote
apply to this product and service. See the
Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list
of applicable Gracenote patents.
Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS,
the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the
“Powered by Gracenote” logo are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote in the United States and/or other
countries.

TOC

Index
Home

Continued

543

uuCustomer Service Informationu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG
Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide.
You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce
its rights under this Agreement against you
directly in its own name.

Information

TOC

Index
Home

544

The Gracenote service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly
assigned numeric identifier is to allow the
Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote
service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or
warranties, express or implied, regarding
the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in
the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves
the right to delete data from the Gracenote
Servers or to change data categories for any

cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No
warranty is made that the Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers are errorfree or that functioning of Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you
with new enhanced or additional data types
or categories that Gracenote may provide in
the future and is free to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES
NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES.
© Gracenote 2009

■ Disclaimer of Pandora®
Requirements to access Pandora®
• Latest version of the Pandora app
installed on your Android, Blackberry,
or iPhone.
• Registered Pandora account (you can
create a free account at
www.pandora.com

or on your smartphone)
• Connection to the internet via WiFi or
cellular data network.

uuCustomer Service Informationu

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Information

Limitations
• Access to Pandora requires an active
internet connection
• Ability to access Pandora through this
system is subject to change without
notice
• Certain functionality of Pandora service is
not available when accessing the service
through this system including, but not
limited to, creating new stations, deleting
stations, emailing current stations,
buying songs, viewing additional text
information, logging in to Pandora, and
adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality.
Pandora internet radio is a music service
not affiliated with HONDA. More
information is available at
http://www.pandora.com
.
Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the
Pandora trade address are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Pandora Media,
Inc., used with permission.
• Mobile access requires a smartphone
with an active data plan. Standard data
rates may apply.
• Pandora is only available in the United
States.

TOC

Index
Home

545

INDEX
QRG

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

Index
Numbers
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode .................... 411
Operation ................................................ 412

A

Index

Index
Home

546

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 441
Accessories and Modifications ................. 449
Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 138
Additives
Coolant ................................................... 469
Engine Oil................................................ 463
Washer.................................................... 474
Additives, Engine Oil ................................ 463
Adjusting
Front Seats .............................................. 125
Head Restraints........................................ 128
Mirrors .................................................... 123
Rear Seats................................................ 132
Steering Wheel ........................................ 122
Temperature.............................................. 82
AhaTM ......................................................... 204
Air Conditioning System
(Climate Control System)........................ 142
Changing the Mode ................................ 142
Defrosting the Windshield
and Windows ........................................ 143
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 497
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 142
Sensor ..................................................... 145
Synchronized Mode ................................. 144

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

2013 Accord Coupe
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 142
Air Pressure............................... 486, 531, 533
Airbags........................................................ 37
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 43
After a Collision ........................................ 40
Airbag Care............................................... 49
Event Data Recorder.................................. 23
Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 40
Indicator.............................................. 47, 70
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 48
Sensors ..................................................... 37
Side Airbags .............................................. 44
Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 46
AM/FM Radio............................ 161, 188, 227
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 441
Indicator.................................................... 69
Audio Remote Controls ........................... 153
Audio System............................................ 148
Adjusting the Sound................ 159, 186, 217
Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 150
Error Messages........................................ 263
General Information ................................ 269
HDD........................................................ 237
Internet Radio ......................... 170, 202, 255
iPod®....................................... 167, 198, 247
MP3/WMA/AAC...................... 172, 205, 258
Reactivating ............................................ 151
Recommended CDs................................. 270
Recommended Devices............................ 272
Remote Controls ..................................... 153
Security Code.......................................... 151

Theft Protection ...................................... 151
Touch Screen .................................. 178, 211
USB Flash Drives...................................... 272
USB Port ................................................. 149
Authorized Manuals ................................ 541
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .................. 96
Customize ...................................... 291, 302
Automatic Lighting.................................. 114
Automatic Transmission .......................... 408
Creeping................................................. 408
Fluid ....................................................... 472
Kickdown ............................................... 408
Operating the Shift Lever .................. 17, 414
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 517
Shifting................................................... 413
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
Creeping................................................. 408
Fluid ....................................................... 471
Kickdown ............................................... 408
Operating the Shift Lever .................. 16, 410
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 517
Shifting................................................... 409
Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 150
Average Fuel Economy .............................. 81

B
Battery ...................................................... 494
Charging System Indicator ................ 67, 520
Jump Starting ......................................... 514
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 494

INDEX

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

2013 Accord Coupe

C
Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 62
Cargo Hooks ............................................. 139
Carrying Cargo.................................. 393, 395
CD Player................................... 164, 195, 234
Center Pocket ........................................... 136
Certification Label .................................... 534
Changing Bulbs......................................... 475
Charging System Indicator ................. 67, 520
Child Safety ................................................. 50
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 100
Child Seat .................................................... 50
Booster Seats............................................. 61
Child Seat for Infants................................. 52
Child Seat for Small Children ..................... 53
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Seat Belt .................................................. 57
Larger Children.......................................... 60
Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 52
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 54
Using a Tether ........................................... 59
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 500
Cleaning the Interior ................................ 498
Climate Control System............................ 142
Changing the Mode ................................ 142
Defrosting the Windshield
and Windows ........................................ 143
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 497
Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 142
Sensors.................................................... 145
Synchronized Mode................................. 144

Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 142
Clock............................................................ 84
Clutch Fluid............................................... 473
Coat Hook................................................. 139
Compact Spare Tire .................. 505, 531, 533
Compass .................................................... 388
Console Compartment ............................. 135
Controls....................................................... 83
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 469
Adding to the Radiator............................ 470
Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 469
Overheating ............................................ 518
Creeping
(Automatic Transmission/CVT)............... 408
Cruise Control........................................... 421
Indicator.................................................... 75
Cup Holders .............................................. 137
Customer Service Information................. 542
Customized Features................................ 273

QRG

D
Daytime Running Lights ..........................
Dead Battery.............................................
Defrosting the Windshield
and Windows..........................................
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ...............
Dimming
Headlights...............................................
Rearview Mirror.......................................
Dipstick (Engine Oil).................................

116
514
143
535

Index

Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 495
Belts (Seat).................................................. 30
Beverage Holders..................................... 137
Bluetooth® Audio..................... 175, 208, 261
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ............ 313, 350
Booster Seats (For Children)...................... 61
Brake System ............................................ 439
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 441
Brake Assist System................................. 442
Fluid ....................................................... 473
Foot Brake .............................................. 440
Indicator ........................................... 66, 522
Parking Brake.......................................... 439
Brake System Indicator (Amber) ............... 66
Brake System Indicator (Red) .................... 66
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 118
Bulb Replacement.................................... 475
Brake/Taillights, Back-Up Lights, Rear Turn
Signal Lights and Rear Side Marker
Lights.................................................. 481
Fog Lights ............................................... 478
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights ....... 479
Headlights .............................................. 475
High-Mount Brake Light.......................... 482
Parking Lights ......................................... 480
Parking/Daytime Running Lights.............. 480
Rear License Plate Lights ......................... 482
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator
Lights.................................................... 479
Bulb Specifications........................... 530, 532

113
123
464

Index
Home

547

INDEX

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Index

Index
Home

548

Directional Signals (Turn Signal).............. 113
Display Button .......................... 155, 181, 213
Door Mirrors ............................................. 124
Doors ........................................................... 86
Auto Door Locking .................................... 96
Auto Door Unlocking................................. 96
Door and Trunk Open Indicator ........... 29, 70
Keys .......................................................... 86
Locking/Unlocking the Doors
from the Inside ........................................ 94
Locking/Unlocking the Doors
from the Outside ..................................... 89
Lockout Prevention System ........................ 93
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 488
Driving....................................................... 391
Automatic Transmission (CVT) ................. 408
Braking.................................................... 439
Cruise Control ......................................... 421
Shifting Gear ................................... 413, 417
Shifting Position....................................... 409
Starting the Engine .......................... 401, 403
Driving Position Memory System............. 120
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 497

E
Eco Assist System .......................................... 7
ECON Button............................................. 420
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator ............................................ 71, 522
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 431

Emergency ................................................ 527
Emergency Trunk Opener........................ 100
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)....... 537
Engine ....................................................... 534
Coolant................................................... 469
Jump Starting.......................................... 514
Oil........................................................... 463
Starting ........................................... 401, 403
Switch Buzzer.......................................... 108
Engine Coolant......................................... 469
Adding to the Radiator............................ 470
Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 469
Overheating ............................................ 518
Temperature Gauge .................................. 79
Engine Oil ................................................. 463
Adding.................................................... 466
Checking................................................. 464
Displaying Oil Life.................................... 455
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 67, 520
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 463
ENGINE START/STOP Button .................... 109
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
System ............................................... 71, 522
Exhaust Gas Hazard
(Carbon Monoxide) .................................. 62
Expanded View Driver’s Mirror ............... 124
Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 500
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 124

F
Features .................................................... 147
Filters
Dust and Pollen....................................... 497
Oil .......................................................... 467
Flat Tire..................................................... 505
Floor Mats ................................................ 499
Fluids
Automatic Transmission .......................... 472
Brake/Clutch ........................................... 473
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) .................................................... 471
Engine Coolant ....................................... 469
Manual Transmission .............................. 471
Windshield Washer ................................. 474
Fog Light Indicator .................................... 72
Folding Down the Rear Seat ................... 132
Foot Brake ................................................ 440
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .......... 424
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 40
Front Seats................................................ 125
Adjusting ................................................ 125
Fuel ..................................................... 18, 446
Economy................................................. 448
Gauge ...................................................... 79
Instant Fuel Economy ................................ 81
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 69
Range ....................................................... 82
Recommendation.................................... 446
Refueling ................................................ 446
Fuel Economy ........................................... 448

INDEX

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

2013 Accord Coupe
Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 18, 447
Message ................................................. 521
Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 18, 447
Fuses ......................................................... 524
Inspecting and Changing ........................ 526
Locations ........................................ 524, 525

G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy................................................. 448
Gauge ...................................................... 79
Information............................................. 446
Instant Fuel Economy ................................ 81
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 69
Refueling ................................................ 446
Gauges........................................................ 79
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission .......................... 413
Automatic Transmission (CVT)................. 409
Manual Transmission .............................. 418
Glass (care) ............................................... 501
Glove Box ................................................. 135

Halogen Bulbs .................................. 475, 478
Handling the Unexpected ....................... 503
HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ...................... 313, 350
Auto Answer .................................. 329, 365

High Beam Indicator .................................. 72
Hill Start Assist System ..................... 402, 406
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver............ 311

QRG

I
Identification Numbers
Engine and Transmission ......................... 534
Vehicle Identification ............................... 534
Ignition Switch ......................................... 108
Illumination Control
Knob....................................................... 118
Immobilizer System .................................. 101
Indicator.................................................... 72
Indicators .................................................... 66
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)..................... 69
Brake System (Amber) ............................... 66
Brake System (Red).................................... 66
Charging System ............................... 67, 520
CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 75, 422
CRUISE MAIN .................................... 75, 421
Door and Trunk Open ............................... 70
ECON Mode...................................... 75, 420
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
System ............................................ 71, 522
Fog Light................................................... 72
Forward Collision Warning (FCW).............. 73
High Beam ................................................ 72
Immobilizer System ................................... 72
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)................. 74
Light Control............................................. 76

Index

H

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and
Call History .................................... 331, 367
Automatic Transferring .................... 329, 365
Displaying Messages........................ 345, 384
Editing User Name................................... 364
HFL Buttons..................................... 313, 350
HFL Menus ...................................... 316, 352
HFL Status Display ........................... 315, 351
Limitations for Manual Operation .... 315, 351
Making a Call .................................. 335, 376
Options During a Call ...................... 342, 381
Phone Setup .................................... 321, 356
Phonebook Phonetic Modification ........... 371
Receiving a Call ............................... 341, 380
Receiving a Text Message/E-mail ...... 343, 382
Ring Tone........................................ 330, 366
Selecting a Mail Account ................. 344, 383
Speed Dial ....................................... 332, 368
To Create a Security PIN .................. 328, 363
To Set Up a Text Message/
E-mail Options ............................... 326, 361
Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio ................... 237
Hazard Warning Button............................... 2
Head Restraints......................................... 128
Headlights ................................................. 113
Aiming .................................................... 475
Automatic Operation............................... 114
Dimming ......................................... 113, 116
Operating................................................ 113
Heaters (Seat) ........................................... 141
HFL (HandsFreeLink®) ....................... 313, 350

Index
Home

549

INDEX

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Index

Index
Home

550

Lights On................................................... 72
Low Fuel.................................................... 69
Low Oil Pressure ................................ 67, 520
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............. 71, 435, 437
Maintenance Minder ......................... 75, 455
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............... 67, 521
Parking Brake and Brake System ........ 66, 522
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 31, 69
Security System Alarm ............................... 72
Smart Entry System.................................... 75
Starter System ........................................... 76
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 47, 70
Transmission.............................................. 69
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning ............... 71
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist)
System............................................. 70, 431
VSA® OFF .......................................... 70, 432
Washer Level ............................................. 75
Information............................................... 529
Information Display.................................... 80
Instant Fuel Economy ................................. 81
Instrument Panel ........................................ 65
Brightness Control ................................... 118
Interface Dial ............................................ 210
Interior Lights ........................................... 133
Interior Rearview Mirror .......................... 123

J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench)......................... 508
Jump Starting............................................ 514

K
Key Number Tag......................................... 87
Keyless Lockout Prevention ....................... 93
Keys ............................................................. 86
Lockout Prevention.................................... 93
Master Keys .............................................. 86
Number Tag .............................................. 87
Remote Transmitter................................... 89
Types and Functions .................................. 86
Valet Key............................................. 87, 99
Won’t Turn ............................................... 21
Kickdown
(Automatic Transmission/CVT)............... 408

Locking/Unlocking ..................................... 86
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................... 96
From Inside ............................................... 94
From Outside ............................................ 89
Keys.......................................................... 86
Using a Key............................................... 93
Lockout Prevention System ....................... 93
Low Battery Charge ................................. 520
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 69
Low Oil Pressure Indicator................. 67, 520
Low Smart Entry Remote
Signal Strength......................................... 88
Lower Anchors ........................................... 55
Lubricant Specifications Chart ........ 530, 532
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit)............. 395

L
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ............. 428
LaneWatchTM .......................................... 433
Language (HFL) ................................ 315, 351
LATCH (Child Seats).................................... 55
Lights................................................. 113, 475
Automatic ............................................... 114
Bulb Replacement ................................... 475
Daytime Running Lights........................... 116
Fog Lights ............................................... 115
High Beam Indicator.................................. 72
Interior .................................................... 133
Light Switches ......................................... 113
Lights On Indicator .................................... 72
Turn Signals ............................................ 113
Load Limits................................................ 395

M
Maintenance ............................................
Battery ....................................................
Brake/Clutch Fluid ...................................
Cleaning .................................................
Climate Control System ..........................
Coolant ..................................................
Maintenance MinderTM ............................
Oil ..........................................................
Precautions .............................................
Radiator ..................................................
Remote Transmitter ................................
Replacing Light Bulbs ..............................
Safety .....................................................

451
494
473
498
497
469
455
464
452
470
495
475
453

INDEX

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

2013 Accord Coupe
Service Items........................................... 457
Tires........................................................ 485
Transmission Fluid................................... 471
Under the Hood...................................... 459
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............. 67, 521
Manual Transmission ............................... 417
Map Lights................................................ 134
Maximum Load Limit ............................... 395
Meters, Gauges .......................................... 79
Mirrors ...................................................... 123
Adjusting ................................................ 123
Door ....................................................... 124
Exterior ................................................... 124
Interior Rearview..................................... 123
Modifications (and Accessories).............. 449
Moonroof ................................................. 107
MP3................... 164, 172, 195, 205, 234, 258
Multi-View Rear Camera ......................... 444

N
Numbers (Identification) ......................... 534

O

P
Paddle Shifters
(7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) ................ 411
Paddle Shifters
(Sequential Shift Mode) ......................... 415
Pandora® ................................... 171, 203, 256
Panic Mode ............................................... 103
Parking ...................................................... 443
Parking Brake ........................................... 439
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator ............................................ 66, 522
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 48
Passing Indicators ..................................... 113
Power Windows........................................ 104
Precautions While Driving ....................... 407
Rain......................................................... 407
Pregnant Women ....................................... 35
Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 505

R
Radiator .................................................... 470
Radio (AM/FM) ......................... 161, 188, 227
Radio (XM®) ...................................... 192, 231
Radio Data System (RDS) ......... 162, 190, 229
Range .......................................................... 82
RDS (Radio Data System) ......... 162, 190, 229
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing)....... 537
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button ..................................................... 119
Rear Seat (Folding Down)........................ 132
Rearview Camera ..................................... 445
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 123
Refueling .................................................. 446
Fuel Gauge................................................ 79
Gasoline.................................. 446, 530, 532
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 69
Regulations............................... 437, 488, 535
Remote Transmitter ................................... 89
Replacement
Battery .................................................... 495
Bulbs....................................................... 475
Fuses............................................... 524, 525
Tires ........................................................ 491
Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 483
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 536
Resetting a Trip Meter ............................... 81

QRG

Index

Odometer ................................................... 81
Oil (Engine) .............................................. 463
Adding ................................................... 466
Checking ................................................ 464
Displaying Oil Life ................................... 455
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 67, 520

Recommended Engine Oil........................ 463
Viscosity .................................................. 463
Opening/Closing
Hood....................................................... 461
Moonroof................................................ 107
Power Windows ...................................... 104
Trunk ........................................................ 97
Outside Temperature Display .................... 82
Overheating .............................................. 518

Index

S
Safe Driving ................................................ 25

Home

551

INDEX

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

2013 Accord Coupe
QRG

Index

Index
Home

552

Safety Check................................................ 29
Safety Labels ............................................... 63
Safety Message ........................................... 24
Seat Belts..................................................... 30
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners.................. 32
Checking ................................................... 36
Fastening................................................... 33
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Seat Belt .................................................. 57
Pregnant Women ...................................... 35
Reminder................................................... 31
Warning Indicator................................ 31, 69
Seat Heaters .............................................. 141
Seats .......................................................... 125
Adjusting................................................. 125
Front Seats .............................................. 125
Rear Seats................................................ 132
Seat Heaters ............................................ 141
Security System ......................................... 101
Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 72
Security System Alarm Indicator ................. 72
Select Lever ......................... 16, 409, 413, 417
Operation .......................... 16, 410, 414, 417
Releasing ................................................. 517
Won’t Move ............................................ 517
Select/Reset Knob ....................................... 80
Selecting a Child Seat ................................. 54
Selector Knob (Audio) ...................... 154, 177
Sequential Shift Mode.............................. 415
Operation ................................................ 416
Setting the Clock ........................................ 84

Shift Lever........................... 16, 409, 413, 417
Shift Position Indicator .............. 68, 410, 414
Shifting (Transmission)............. 409, 413, 417
Side Airbags................................................ 44
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 46
Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System ....................................................... 91
Snow Tires................................................. 493
Spare Tire.................................. 505, 531, 533
Spark Plugs ....................................... 530, 532
Specifications............................................ 530
Specified Fuel ........................... 446, 530, 532
Speedometer .............................................. 79
SRS Airbags (Airbags)................................. 40
Starting the Engine .......................... 401, 403
Does Not Start......................................... 511
Engine Switch Buzzer .............................. 108
Jump Starting.......................................... 514
Steering Wheel......................................... 122
Adjusting ................................................ 122
Stopping ................................................... 443
Summer Tires ............................................ 493
Sunglasses Holder..................................... 140
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........ 40
Switches
(Around the Steering Wheel) ........ 2, 3, 108
SYNC Mode............................................... 144

T
Tachometer................................................. 79

Temperature
Outside Temperature Display .................... 82
Temperature Sensor .......................... 82, 145
Time (Setting)............................................. 84
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)..................................................... 435
Indicator ........................................... 71, 523
Tires .......................................................... 485
Air Pressure............................. 486, 531, 533
Checking and Maintaining ...................... 485
Inspection ............................................... 485
Labeling .................................................. 486
Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 505
Regulations............................................. 488
Rotation.................................................. 492
Spare Tire ............................... 505, 531, 533
Summer .................................................. 493
Tire Chains.............................................. 493
Wear Indicators....................................... 490
Winter .................................................... 493
Tools ......................................................... 504
Towing a Trailer....................................... 397
Equipment and Accessories..................... 398
Load Limits ............................................. 397
Towing Your Vehicle ............................... 400
Emergency.............................................. 527
TPMS
(Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ........ 435
Indicator ........................................... 71, 523
Transmission............................. 409, 413, 417
Automatic............................................... 413

INDEX

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

2013 Accord Coupe
Automatic (CVT) ..................................... 409
Fluid ............................................... 471, 472
Manual ................................................... 417
Number .................................................. 534
Shift Lever Position Indicator ..... 68, 410, 414
Trip Meter .................................................. 81
Troubleshooting ...................................... 503
Blown Fuse ..................................... 524, 525
Brake Pedal Vibrates ................................. 21
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door ......... 22
Emergency Towing ................................. 527
Engine Won’t Start ................................. 511
Noise When Braking ................................. 22
Overheating............................................ 518
Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 505
Select Lever Won’t Move ........................ 517
Warning Indicators.................................... 66
Trunk .......................................................... 97
Lid ............................................................ 97
Light Bulb ....................................... 530, 532
Main Switch.............................................. 99
Turn Signals.............................................. 113
Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 71

Unlocking the Doors.................................. 89
Unlocking the Front Doors
from the Inside......................................... 11
USB Flash Drives ....................................... 272
USB Port.................................................... 149

V
Valet Key............................................... 87, 99
Vanity Mirrors ............................................... 5
Vehicle Identification Number ................ 534
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) .................. 431
Off Button............................................... 432
Off Indicator .............................................. 70
System Indicator ........................................ 70
Ventilation ................................................ 142
Viscosity (Oil) ............................ 463, 531, 533
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) .................. 431

W
Warning and Information Messages......... 77
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 520
Warning Labels........................................... 63
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately)............................................... 539
Watts ................................................. 530, 532
Wear Indicators (Tire)............................... 490
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 508
Window Washers...................................... 117
Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 474
Switch ..................................................... 117
Windows (Opening and Closing)............. 104

Windshield................................................ 117
Cleaning ................................................. 501
Defrosting/Defogging.............................. 143
Washer Fluid ........................................... 474
Wiper Blades ........................................... 483
Wipers and Washers................................ 117
Winter Tires .............................................. 493
Snow Tires .............................................. 493
Tire Chains .............................................. 493
Wipers and Washers................................. 117
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 483
WMA ................. 164, 172, 195, 205, 234, 258
Worn Tires ................................................ 485

QRG

X
XM® Radio ........................................ 192, 231

Index

U

Using the Smart Entry with Push Button
Start System .............................................. 91

Index
Home

553



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2012:09:28 18:54:42Z
Modify Date                     : 2012:10:12 10:26:05-07:00
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 9.0
Metadata Date                   : 2012:10:12 10:26:05-07:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 
Creator                         : 
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.5.2 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:e468d5fc-396a-4473-a232-17ed44c8878d
Instance ID                     : uuid:6f4b02a5-500b-41e6-8766-ef2df14d6592
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Count                      : 554
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu